2005 chevrolet avalanche owner manual m - buick · 2020-03-17 · 2005 chevrolet avalanche owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-7Safety Belts .............................................. 1-9Child Restraints ....................................... 1-29Airbag System ......................................... 1-49Restraint System Check ............................ 1-63

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8Windows ................................................. 2-24Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-26Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-28Mirrors .................................................... 2-45OnStar® System ...................................... 2-54HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-56Storage Areas ......................................... 2-60Sunroof .................................................. 2-84Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-85

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-28Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-45Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-64

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-56

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12Rear Axle ............................................... 5-49Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-50Front Axle ............................................... 5-51Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-52Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-60Tires ...................................................... 5-61Appearance Care ..................................... 5-95Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-104Electrical System .................................... 5-105Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-114

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2005 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename AVALANCHE are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it isever needed. If the vehicle is sold, leave this manualin the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle. If thisis done, it can help you learn about the featuresand controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words worktogether in the owner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 05AVALANCHE A First Edition ©2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Weuse a box and the word CAUTION to tell about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-2Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5Head Restraints .............................................1-7

Rear Seats .......................................................1-7Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7

Safety Belts .....................................................1-9Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Driver Position ..............................................1-14Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-22Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-23Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults ..........................1-26Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28

Child Restraints .............................................1-29Older Children ..............................................1-29Infants and Young Children ............................1-32Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38

Top Strap ....................................................1-39Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-40Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers

for Children (LATCH System) ......................1-41Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ....................................1-43Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ............................................1-43Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position ....................................1-45Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ....................................1-46Airbag System ...............................................1-49

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-51When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-54What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-55How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-56What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-56Passenger Sensing System ............................1-58Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-62Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-62Restraint System Check ..................................1-63

Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-63Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-64

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Passenger Seat

If your vehicle has a manual front passenger split benchseat, you can adjust it with this lever located at thefront of the seat.

Lift the lever to unlock the seat and use your body toslide the seat to where you want it. Release thelever and try to move the seat with your body to makesure that the seat is locked into place.

Power Seats

If your vehicle has power seat(s), the controls arelocated on the outboard edge of the front seats.

1-2

Horizontal Control: This control adjusts theseat cushion.

• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising orlowering the forward edge of the control. Raiseor lower the rear of the seat by raising or loweringthe rear edge of the control.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving thewhole control toward the front or toward the rearof the vehicle.

• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by movingthe whole control up or down.

Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.

Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward bymoving the control toward the rear or the front of thevehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.

For more information on the reclining seatbacks, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.

Your vehicle may have a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat on page 2-85 for more information.

Power Lumbar

If your vehicle has powerlumbar adjustment, youcan use it to increaseor decrease lumbarsupport in the lowerseatback. The control islocated on the outboardside of the seat cushion.

• To increase support in the lower back area, pressand hold the front of the control. Let go of thecontrol when the lower seatback reaches thedesired level of support.

• To decrease support in the lower back area, pressand hold the rear of the control. Let go of thecontrol when the lower seatback reaches thedesired level of support.

1-3

You can also reshape the back wing area of thelower seatback.

• To increase support in the wing area of the lowerseatback, press and hold the top of the control.Let go of the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of support.

• To decrease support in the wing area of the lowerseatback, press and hold the bottom of the control.Let go of the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of support.

Heated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated front seats. Thebuttons used to control thisfeature are located onthe front doors. The enginemust be running for theheated seat featureto work.

To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button withthe heated seat symbol. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium andlow and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lightswill glow to designate the level of heat selected,three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

1-4

The low setting warms the seatback and cushion untilthe seat temperature is near body temperature. Themedium and high settings heat the seatback and seatcushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be ableto feel heat in about two minutes.

To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button withthe heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on theseatback button will glow to designate that only theseatback is being heated. Additional presses ofthe seatback button will cycle through the heat levels forthe seatback only. Press the horizontal button againto heat the whole seat.

The heated front seats will shut off automatically whenthe ignition is turned off.

Reclining Seatbacks

If you have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever islocated on the outboard side of the seat cushion.To adjust the front seatback, lift the lever. Release thelever to lock the seatback where you want it. Liftthe lever without pushing on the seatback and theseatback will go to an upright position.

If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,see Power Seats on page 1-2 for further information onhow to operate the reclining seatback feature.

1-5

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can not do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can not do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt can not do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safetybelt properly.

1-6

Head Restraints

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle areadjustable. They work the same as the front seathead restraints.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationThe rear seat is a 60/40 split rear seat that can befolded to give you more cargo space and access to thefolding midgate. See Midgate on page 2-13 for moreinformation on operation of the folding midgate.

To fold either side of the seat do the following:

1. Push the rear head restraints all the way down.2. Pull the seat loop

located where theseatback andseat cushion meet. Theseat cushion willrelease and allow youto tilt it toward thefront of the vehicle.

1-7

3. Grasp the seatback and pull it toward the front ofthe vehicle. Push it down until it is flat. You mayhave to move the front seats forward slightly todo this.

4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.

To return the seats to the normal position, pull theseatback up and fold the seat cushion down.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure itis locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will not providethe protection needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriously injured.After raising the rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are not twisted.

1-8

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she can notwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

1-9

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-30.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter...a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

1-10

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

1-11

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-12

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accidentif I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you are upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every airbagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that hasairbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

1-13

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in anaccident — even one that is not your fault — youand your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29or Infants and Young Children on page 1-32. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wearit properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.

1-14

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-28.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you will beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid underit, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

1-15

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-16


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-17


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goesover an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch too high. In a crash, you can slide underthe belt. The belt force would then be appliedat the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, andthat could cause serious or fatal injuries. Besure the belt goes under the armrests.

1-18


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-19

Q: What wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-20

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-21

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — except forone thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of thebelt out all the way, you will engage the child restraintlocking feature which may turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let thebelt go back all the way and start again.

Center Front Passenger PositionIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sitin the center position.

Lap Belt

When you sit in a center front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To makethe belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it alongthe belt.

1-22

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-28.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-23

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Hereis how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-28.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-24

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-25

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each passenger position in therear seat.

Here is how to install a comfort guide and use thesafety belt:

1. Remove the guide from the storage clip on the sideof the rear seatback.

1-26

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The guide must be on top of the belt.

1-27

4. Buckle, position and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 1-23. Make sure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Attach the guide onto the storage clip.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer willorder you an extender. It is free. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender hasbeen designed for adults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

1-28

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat thathas a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-29

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can not properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Ifthe child is sitting in the center position, movethe child toward the safety belt buckle. In eithercase, be sure that the shoulder belt still is onthe child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’supper body would have the restraint that beltsprovide. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small Adults on page 1-26.

If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is stillvery close to the child’s face or neck, you mightwant to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,if your vehicle has one.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

1-31

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby does notweigh much — until a crash. During a crash ababy will become so heavy it is not possibleto hold it. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. A baby should be secured inan appropriate restraint.

1-32

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

1-33

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. This isnecessary because a newborn infant’s neck isweak and its head weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants always should be secured inappropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-34

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-35

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,and some high-back booster seats have a five-pointharness. A booster seat can also help a child to see outthe window.

1-36

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has strapsthat come down over each of the infant’s shouldersand buckle together at the crotch. The five-pointharness system has two shoulder straps, two hipstraps and a crotch strap. A shield may take theplace of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are attached to a flat pad which rests lowagainst the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-typeshield has straps that are attached to a wide,shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-37

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.General Motors recommends that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in arear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visorsays, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the passenger’s frontal

CAUTION: (Continued)


airbag if the system detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing child restraintsbe secured in the rear seat, even if the airbagis off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraint in arear seat

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

1-38

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, do not use the restraint unless it isanchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child

restraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

1-39

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchorpoints. Be sure to use an anchor point located on thesame side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the topstrap under it.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

Top Strap Anchor Location

An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located on theback of the rear seat frame above the floor for eachrear seating position. In order to get to the brackets, youwill have to fold the rear seatback(s). See Rear SeatOperation on page 1-7 for information on folding therear seatbacks.

60/40 Split Rear Seat Folded

1-40

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local law requiresthat the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored. There is no place to anchor the topstrap in this position.

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will findanchors in the center and right side passenger secondrow seating positions.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Some restraintsalso use another vehicle anchor to secure a toptether strap.

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower AnchorageC. Top Tether

1-41

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this childrestraint system, each seating position with theLATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point inthe seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

1-42

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-41.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-39.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the toptether from the top tether anchorage and thendisconnect the LATCH attachments from theLATCH anchorages.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-41. See Top Strapon page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-43

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-44

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat PositionDo not use child restraints in this position. The restraintswill not work properly.

1-45

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. A rearseat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing childrestraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38.

In addition, your vehicle may have the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-32 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the passenger’s frontalairbag if the system detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. General Motors recommends thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in therear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat position, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the forward-facingchild restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2 or ManualPassenger Seat on page 1-2.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-41.

1-46

There is no top strap anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires that thetop strap be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-39 if your childrestraint has one.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-58.General Motors recommends that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe air bag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Power Seats on page 1-2 or ManualPassenger Seat on page 1-2.When the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal air bag, the offindicator in the passenger air bag status indicatorshould light and stay lit when you turn the ignition toRUN or START. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-32.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-47

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt. You should not beable to pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

1-48


8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing systemand the air bag is off, the off indicator will be lit andstay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the keyis turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the childrestraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightlyrecline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seatcushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint isnot trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle andcheck with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for thedriver and another frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger. Your vehicle may also have side impactairbags. Side impact airbags are available for the driverand right front passenger.If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driverand/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG willappear on the airbag covering on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

1-49

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are designed to workwith safety belts but do not replace them.Frontal airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or inmany side crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than more forcefulairbags have provided in the past.Side impact airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to inflate only inmoderate to severe crashes where something



hits the side of your vehicle. They are notdesigned to inflate in frontal, in rollover or inrear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of an eye.If you are too close to an inflating airbag, as youwould be if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts help keep youin position for airbag inflation before and duringa crash. Always wear your safety belt, even withfrontal airbags. The driver should sit as far backas possible while still maintaining control of thevehicle. Front occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door.

1-50

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see Older Children on page 1-29 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-32.

There is an airbagreadiness light onthe instrument panelcluster, which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

1-51

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbagis in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-52

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s sideimpact airbag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Donot put anything between an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or put anything onthe steering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.

1-53

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate onlyif the impact exceeds a predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholds take into account avariety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crash islikely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle istraveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the directionof the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensorswhich help the sensing system distinguish between amoderate and a more severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move ordeform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment isabout 10 to 16 mph (16 to 25 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 20 to 30 mph(32 to 48 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, however,with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.)

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagcould inflate at a different crash speed than ifthe object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate ata different crash speed than if the object doesnot deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) arenot intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not likely help the occupants.

Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped withspecial sensors which enable the sensing system tomonitor the position of both the driver and passengerfront seats. The seat position sensor providesinformation which is used to determine if the airbagsshould deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.

1-54

Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.See Airbag System on page 1-49. Side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system’s designed “thresholdlevel.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not designed toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rearimpacts, because inflation would not likely help theoccupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For sideimpact airbags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

The airbag system is designed to work properly under awide range of conditions, including off-road usage.Observe safe driving speeds, especially on roughterrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-RoadDriving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle onpage 4-18 for tips on off-road driving.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For bothfrontal and side impact airbags, the sensing systemtriggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflatesthe airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modulesare located inside the steering wheel and instrumentpanel. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the airbagmodules are located in the seatback closest to thedriver’s and/or right front passenger’s door.

1-55

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontalairbags would not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward theairbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including frontal or near frontalcollisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.Airbags should never be regarded as anything more thana supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’sand right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only inmoderate to severe side collisions for vehicles with adriver’s and right front passenger’s side impact airbag.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the airbaginflated. Some components of the airbag module will behot for a short time. These components include thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontalairbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the side ofthe seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right frontpassenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dustcoming from the vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeingor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stoppeople from leaving the vehicle.

1-56

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan not get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts foryour airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect youin another crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records information aftera crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders on page 7-9.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that anairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer for service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbagcovering on the driver’s and right front passenger’sseatback, the airbag may not work properly. You mayhave to replace the airbag module in the steeringwheel, both the airbag module and the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or boththe airbag module and seatback for the driver’s andright front passenger’s side impact airbag. Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

1-57

Passenger Sensing SystemIf your rearview mirror has one of the indicators picturedin the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passengersensing system. The indicator will be visible when youturn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words ONand OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible onthe rearview mirror during the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either the word ON or the wordOFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will bevisible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-32. If your rearview mirror does not have either ofthe indicators pictured, then your vehicle does not havethe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not partof the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger’s seat and safetybelt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant and determine if thepassenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (mayinflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.General Motors recommends that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in arear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada

1-58

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” Thisis because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, ifthe airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the passenger’s frontalairbag if the system detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing child restraintsbe secured in the rear seat, even if the airbagis off.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied

• the system determines that an infant is present in arear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child is presentin a forward-facing child restraint

• the system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off ofthe seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off thepassenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicatoris lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraintfrom the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint followingthe child restraint manufacturer’s directions and referto Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position on page 1-46.

1-59

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the childrestraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightlyrecline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seatcushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint isnot trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle andcheck with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontalairbag anytime the system senses that a person of adultsize is sitting properly in the right front passenger’sseat. When the passenger sensing system has allowedthe airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat. Ifthis happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seatback in the fully upright position, then situpright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicleand have the person remain in this position for abouttwo minutes. This will allow the system to detect thatperson and then enable the passenger’s airbag.

1-60

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrumentpanel cluster ever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, have the



vehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have the protectionof the frontal airbag. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-31 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affecthow well the passenger sensing system operates.You may want to consider not using seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passengersensing system. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect how thesystem operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seator between the passenger’s seat cushion andseatback may interfere with the properoperation of the passenger sensing system.

1-61

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are airbag system parts in several places aroundyour vehicle. You do not want the system to inflatewhile someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealerand the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front orsides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, front end or side sheetmetal or height, they may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Also, the airbag system maynot work properly if you relocate any of the airbagsensors. If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Twoof the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 7-2.

1-62

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get myvehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my advanced airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule (located under the driver’s seat), orthe inside rearview mirror can affect the operationof the advanced airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses for Customer Assistanceare in Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-63

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

1-64

Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks .............................................2-8Door Locks ....................................................2-8Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9Delayed Locking .............................................2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Midgate .......................................................2-13Tailgate .......................................................2-22

Windows ........................................................2-24Power Windows ............................................2-25Sun Visors ...................................................2-25

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-26Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-26Passlock® ....................................................2-27

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-28New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-28Ignition Positions ..........................................2-28Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-29Starting Your Engine .....................................2-29

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-30Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-31Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-32Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-35Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-35Parking Brake ..............................................2-40Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-41Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-43Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-43Engine Exhaust ............................................2-44Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-44

Mirrors ...........................................................2-45Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ....................................................2-45

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror withCompass and Temperature Display ..............2-48

Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .........................2-51Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-51Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-52Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-53Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb

View Assist ..............................................2-53OnStar ® System .............................................2-54

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-56Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-57

Storage Areas ................................................2-60Glove Box ...................................................2-60Center Overhead Console ..............................2-60Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-60Center Console Storage Area .........................2-60Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-61

Rear Storage Area ........................................2-61Cargo Cover Panels ......................................2-62All-Weather Cargo Area .................................2-72Top-Box Storage ..........................................2-77Tonneau Cover ............................................2-78

Sunroof .........................................................2-84Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-85

Memory Seat ...............................................2-85

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

2-3

Your vehicle hasone double-sided key forthe ignition, all doorlocks, tailgate and sidestorage boxes.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able toassist you with obtaining replacements.

In an emergency contact roadside assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 formore information.

If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may beable to have your doors unlocked automatically with theOnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®

subscription. For more information see OnStar® Systemon page 2-54.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

2-4

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock your doors from about3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using theremote keyless entry transmitter supplied withyour vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press thisbutton once to unlock thedriver’s door. Theinterior lamps will comeon. Pressing unlock againwithin three secondswill cause the remainingdoors to unlock.

You can choose different feedback options for eachpress of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and“Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-58 for more information.

2-5

Q (Lock): Press this button once to lock all of thedoors. Pressing lock again within three secondsmay cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. Youcan choose different feedback options for each pressof the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “UnlockFeedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-58 for more information.

L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn andflash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum offour transmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care notto touch any of the circuitry. Static from yourbody transferred to these surfaces may damagethe transmitter.

2-6

To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,do the following:

1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slotbetween the covers of the transmitter housingnear the key ring hole. Remove the bottomby twisting the coin.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery,positive (+) side up.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See

“Resynchronization” following this information.5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

ResynchronizationResynchronization may be necessary due to thesecurity method used by this system. The transmitterdoes not send the same signal twice to the receiver. Thereceiver will not respond to a signal that has beensent previously. This prevents anyone from recordingand playing back the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to yourvehicle and press and hold the lock and unlockbuttons on the transmitter at the same time for15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirmsynchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see yourdealer for service.

2-7

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

To unlock the door from the outside, use the keylessentry system or the key.

To unlock or lock the doorfrom the inside, slide themanual lever forwardor rearward.

2-8

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s armrests.

Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press the locksymbol to lock all of the doors.

If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will notlock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Pressthe lock symbol twice to override this feature and lockall of the doors immediately. See Delayed Lockingon page 2-9 for more information.

K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press theunlock symbol.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switch orthe keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking featurewill delay locking the doors until five seconds after thelast door is closed. You will hear three chimes tosignal that the delayed locking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button onthe keyless entry transmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature and immediately lock allthe doors.

You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back onagain by doing the following:

1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in thelock position.

2. Press unlock twice on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.

You can also program this feature using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-58.

2-9

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlockfeature which enables you to program your vehicle’spower door locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the followingmethod. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-58for more information on DIC programming.

Programmable Locking FeatureThe following two modes are availableprogramming options:

Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shiftedout of PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed isgreater than 8 mph (13 km/h).

The following instructions tell you how to changethe automatic door lock mode. Choose one of thetwo programming options listed above before enteringthe program mode. To enter the program mode, dothe following:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice.Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, thedoors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,and a 30-second timer will begin. You are nowready to program the automatic door lock feature.

3. Press the lock side of the power lock switch once.You will hear either one or two chimes. The numberof chimes tells you which lock mode is currentlyselected. Continue to press the door lock switch untilthe number of chimes that you hear matches thenumber of the mode that you want. If you take longerthan 30 seconds, the locks will automatically lockand unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicatethat you have left the program mode. If this occurs,you can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1to re-enter the programming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time by turning theignition to RUN. The doors will automatically lockand unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate thatyou are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlockswitches are not pressed while in the programmingmode, the current automatic settings will notbe modified.

2-10

Programmable Unlocking FeatureThe following is the list of availableprogramming options:

Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).

Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.

The following instructions tell you how to change theautomatic door unlock mode. Choose one of thefour programming options listed above before enteringthe program mode. To enter the program mode, dothe following:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, withthe key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, thedoors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,and a 30-second timer will begin. You are nowready to program the automatic door unlock feature.

3. Press the unlock side of the power lock switch once.You will hear one, two, three, or four chimes. Thenumber of chimes tells you which unlock modeis currently selected. Continue to press thedoor unlock switch until the number of chimes thatyou hear matches the number of the mode thatyou want. If you take longer than 30 seconds, thelocks will automatically lock and unlock and the hornwill chirp twice to indicate that you have left theprogram mode. If this occurs, you can repeatthe procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter theprogramming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time by turning theignition to RUN. The doors will automatically lock andunlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that youare leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switchesare not pressed while in the programming mode, thecurrent automatic settings will not be modified.

2-11

Rear Door Security LocksWith this feature, you can lock the rear doors so theycan’t be opened from the inside by passengers.

This feature is locatedon the inside edge of therear doors.

To use the locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Move the lever forward to engage the rear doorsecurity lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.

The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside whenthis feature is in use. If you want to open the reardoor while the security lock is engaged, unlock the doorand open the door from the outside. Move the leverrearward to disengage the child security lock feature.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking your key in thevehicle when the key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lockand then the driver’s door will unlock.

2-12

Midgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the cargoarea covered and the tailgate and the midgateopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can not see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the cargocovers on and the tailgate and midgate open



or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the midgate:

• Make sure all windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed on the settingthat brings in outside air. This will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System onpage 3-22.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See Engine Exhaust on page 2-44.

2-13

Midgate OperationYour vehicle is equipped with a midgate and aremovable rear glass panel. The midgate allows you toextend the length of your vehicle’s cargo area.

The following are the main components of themidgate system:

A. Latch LeversB. Grab HandlesC. Glass-Catch

Release Button

D. Glass Lock KnobsE. Window Retaining TabsF. Midgate Release HandleG. Window Alignment Arrows

Rear Glass Removal and Storage

{CAUTION:

If the removable rear glass is not storedproperly, it could be thrown about the vehiclein a crash or sudden maneuver. People in thevehicle could be injured. Whenever you storethe rear glass in the vehicle, always be surethat it is stored securely in the midgatestorage pocket.

Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster ison. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defrosteron, you may see a discharge spark coming fromthe latch area.

To remove the rear glass do the following:

1. Fold the rear seats. See Rear Seat Operation onpage 1-7 for more information. The front seatsmay have to be moved forward slightly to allow therear seats to fold completely.Although the rear glass can be removed withoutfolding the rear seats, you will not be able to accessthe rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold theseats before removing the rear glass.

2-14

2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), locatednear the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C)will catch the rear glass and prevent it fromfalling forward.

3. While holding the rear glass in place, press theglass-catch release button (C) and pull the top ofthe rear glass toward you using the grabhandle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass.

2-15

4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out fromthe lower window frame channel. Use the grabhandles to assist you in removing the rear glass.

5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in themidgate, guiding the lower edge of the rear glassbehind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E).Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket,with grab handles facing you, until the next step.

2-16

6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both topcorners of the storage pocket, to the lockedposition. Push in on the corner of the rear glass toallow the lock knob to engage more easily.

Once both glass lock knobs are in the lockedposition, the rear glass is securely stored.

7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position.You should hear a click when each latch leverlocks correctly.The rear seats can be returned to the normalposition when the rear glass is out and storedproperly in the storage pocket.

2-17

Reinstalling the Rear GlassTo reinstall the rear glass, do the following:

1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), locatednear the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.

2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turnthe glass lock knobs, located at both top corners ofthe glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.

3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket usingthe grab handles.

4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, placethe bottom edge in the lower channel of thewindow frame.

2-18

Be sure to align the rearglass side-to-side usingthe alignment arrows (G).

5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push therear glass flat against the window frame. Use thegrab handles at the top of the rear glass toassist you.

6. Push the rear glass flat against the windowframe and push each latch lever up until it locks.You should hear a click when each latch leverlocks correctly.

2-19

Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glassin PlaceThe midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area ofyour vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glasscan be either installed in its normal position, or it can beremoved and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.

To lower the midgate, do the following:

1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have tobe moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats tofold. See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-7 formore information.

2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the midgatesecurely so it does not fall forward. Turn themidgate handle clockwise and pull the midgatetoward you.

Rear Glass in Normal Position

2-20

3. Lower the midgate until it is flat.

Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glassin the Storage Pocket

Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket

2-21

This procedure works the same as the proceduredescribed previously, but when you lower the midgatewith the rear glass in the stored position, you will noticethat the entire crossbar will lower with the midgate.This is completely normal; however, since the crossbarlowers with the midgate, it will be heavier. As youlower the midgate be ready for the extra weight and donot let the midgate fall as you lower it.

Raising the MidgateTo return the midgate to its normal position, raise themidgate up with a firm swinging motion until it latchesinto place securely. This will help to ensure that themidgate closes with enough force to engage the latches.

If the rear glass is removed and you would like to putit back, do so using the instructions given previously.

TailgateUse the ignition/door key to unlock/lock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pullingthe tailgate toward you.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until itlatches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it islatched securely.

Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Attached

2-22

Tailgate RemovalThe tailgate can be removed to allow for differentloading situations. Although the tailgate can be removedwithout assistance, you may want someone to assistyou with the removal to avoid possible damage tothe vehicle.

To remove the tailgate, do the following:

1. Hold the tailgate up, slightly raised.

2. Release the retainingcable clip by lifting thecable so it is levelwith the ground andthen push the cable cliptoward the vehicle. 3. Raise the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull

back on the tailgate at the right edge so itreleases from the block hinge and then move thetailgate to the right to release the left edge.

Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure thetailgate is secure.

2-23

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-24

Power Windows

The controls for the power windows are located on thearmrest on each of the side doors. The switchesoperate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 2-29.

The driver’s door also has a switch for each of thepassenger’s windows.

Press the top of the switch to lower the window. Pull upthe top of the switch to raise the window.

Express-Down WindowsThe driver and front passenger windows also have anexpress-down feature that allows the windows tobe lowered without holding the switch. Press down fullyon the window switch, then release, to activate theexpress-down mode. This mode can be canceled at anytime by pulling up on the switch. To open the windowpartway, press the switch to the first position untilthe window is at the desired position.

Window LockoutPress the lockout switch to prevent passengers fromoperating the power windows from their switches. A lightin the lockout switch will come on to show that theswitch has been activated. Press the lockout switchagain to return to normal operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also swing them out to help block glare at thefront and side windows.

Illuminated Visor Vanity MirrorsPull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turnon the lamps.

2-25

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

With this system, thesecurity light in theinstrument panel clusterwill flash as you openthe door if your ignitionis off.

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrentsystem. Here’s how to do it:

1. Open the door.2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or

the remote keyless entry transmitter. The securitylight should come on and stay on.

3. Close all doors. The security light should go offafter about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armeduntil the security light goes off.

If a locked door is opened without the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turnoff to save the battery power. You can choose differentfeedback options for the alarm. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 3-45.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate ifyou lock the doors with a key or use the manualdoor lock. It activates only if you use a power door lockswitch with the door open, or with the remote keylessentry transmitter. You should also remember thatyou can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key ifthe alarm has been set off.

Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with the doorkey after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door withthe key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressingunlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarmwon’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.

2-26

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s windowand open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors with thepower door lock switch while the door is open, orwith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait forthe security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the doorwith the manual door lock and open the door. Thisshould set off the alarm.

While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch isnot operational.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, seeInstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-106 andUnderhood Fuse Block on page 5-109.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do notflash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.

Passlock ®

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®

theft-deterrent system.Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®

enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned witha valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignitionlock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle will not start.During normal operation, the security light will turn offapproximately five seconds after the key is turnedto RUN.If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, waitabout 10 minutes until the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Remember to releasethe key from START as soon as the engine starts.If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicleneeds service.If the engine is running and the security light comes on,you will be able to restart the engine if you turn theengine off. However, your Passlock® system isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at thistime. You may also want to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105. See yourdealer for service.In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

2-27

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guidelineevery time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing aTrailer on page 4-62 for more information.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four differentpositions.

A (Lock): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove the key when the ignition is turnedto LOCK.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key only withyour hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. Ifnone of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-28

B (Accessory): This position lets you use thingslike the radio and the windshield wipers when theengine is off.

Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as theradio in the accessory ignition position maydrain the battery and prevent your vehicle fromstarting. Do not operate your vehicle in theaccessory ignition position for a long periodof time.

C (Run): This is the position for driving.

D (Start): This position starts the engine.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allowcertain features on your vehicle to continue to workfor up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned toLOCK or until one of the doors is opened.

Starting Your EngineYour vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control.This feature assists in starting the engine and protectsthe electrical system. This feature may cause theengine to crank even after the ignition key is notin START.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position — that isa safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will disengage the startermotor, cause your battery to be drained muchsooner, and add excessive heat that can damageyour starter motor. Try not to hold the key in STARTfor longer than 15 seconds and wait about15 seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floor, whileyou hold the ignition key in START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of the key and let up on theaccelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.

2-29

When starting your engine in very cold weather(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START and hold it there up to15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key.

2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but thenstops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can change theposition of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature isdesigned for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannotmove farther away from the standard position, but canmove closer to you for better pedal reach. Thisfeature can be programmed to work with the memoryfunction (if equipped) on your vehicle. See Memory Seaton page 2-85.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this featureto operate.

The buttons used toadjust the pedals arelocated on the driver’sside door panel.

Press the button closest to you to move the pedalscloser to you. Press the button farthest from you to movethe pedals away from you.

2-30

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an enginecoolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You will get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required. Your vehicle may also have aninternal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This willprevent operation of the engine coolant heater whenthe temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted onthe cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The cord is located on the driver’s side of theengine compartment, near the power steeringfluid reservoir.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not, it couldbe damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advicefor that particular area.

2-31

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmissionand features an electronic shift position indicatorlocated within the instrument panel cluster.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-41. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-62.

2-32

{CAUTION:

Your vehicle will be free to roll — even if yourshift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 2-41.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-44.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does notconnect with the drive wheels. To restart when youare already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

2-33

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-roaddriving. You may want to shift the transmission toTHIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,however it offers more power and lower fuel economythan DRIVE (D).

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) onhills. It can help control your speed as you go downsteep mountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmissionwill drive in second gear. You may use this featurefor reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you aretrying to start your vehicle from a stop on slipperyroad surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift intoDRIVE (D).

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is movingforward, the transmission will not shift into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, yourtransmission is designed to shift differently until theengine reaches normal operating temperature. This isintended to improve heater performance.

2-34

Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode. Thebutton is located on the end of the column shift lever.You can use this feature to assist when towing orhauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing a Trailer on page 4-62 for more information.

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send yourengine’s driving power to all four wheels for extratraction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with its operation. Readthe part that follows before using four-wheel drive.See the appropriate text for the transfer case inyour vehicle.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extended period of time maycause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheeldrive for extended periods of time.

Front Axle Locking FeatureThe front axle locks and unlocks automatically whenyou shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle tolock or unlock is normal.

2-35

Automatic Transfer Case

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You or someoneelse could be seriously injured. Be sure to setthe parking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake onpage 2-40.

The transfer casebuttons are located to theleft of the instrumentpanel cluster.

For four-wheel drive vehicles with StabiliTrak®, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

Use these buttons to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.

You can choose among four driving settings:

h (2HI): This setting is used for driving in most streetand highway situations. Your front axle is not engagedin two-wheel drive. This setting also provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when roadconditions are variable. When driving your vehiclein AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but thevehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels. Whenthe vehicle senses a loss of traction, the systemwill automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving inthis mode results in slightly lower fuel economythan 2HI.

G (4HI): Use the 4HI position when you need extratraction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting also engages your frontaxle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

2-36

5 (4LO): This setting also engages your front axleand delivers extra torque. You may never need thissetting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. Youmight choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in deepsand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descendingsteep hills. Four-wheel drive vehicles with StabiliTrak®

will not engage in this mode. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-10 for more information.

{CAUTION:


NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-56 or TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-56 for more information.

Indicator lights in the button show which setting you arein. The indicator lights will come on briefly when youturn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights donot come on, you should take your vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator light will flash whileshifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated whenthe shift is complete. If for some reason the transfercase cannot make a requested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting.

If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you shouldtake your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service4WD message” under Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-45.

Shifting Into 4HI or AUTO 4WDPress and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD button. Thiscan be done at any speed, except when shiftingfrom 4LO, and the indicator light will flash while shifting.It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.

Shifting Into 2HIPress and release the 2HI button. This can be done atany speed, except when shifting from 4LO.

2-37

Shifting Into 4LOTo shift to the 4LO position, the ignition must be in RUNand the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to haveyour vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Pressand release the 4LO button. You must wait for the4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remainilluminated before shifting your transmission in gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear beforethe 4LO indicator light has stopped flashingcould damage the transfer case. To help avoiddamaging your vehicle, always wait for the4LO indicator light to stop flashing beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significantengagement noise and bump when shifting between4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with theengine running.

If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is ingear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete the shift unless yourvehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 secondsthe transfer case will shift to 4HI mode.

Shifting Out of 4LOTo shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI, yourvehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)and the ignition in RUN. The preferred method forshifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI,AUTO 4WD or 2HI button. You must wait for the 4HI,AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashingand remain illuminated before shifting your transmissioninto gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear beforethe 4LO indicator light has stopped flashingcould damage the transfer case. To help avoiddamaging your vehicle, always wait for the4LO indicator light to stop flashing beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significantengagement noise and bump when shifting between4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with theengine running.

If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed whenyour vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI,AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless yourvehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) andthe transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).

2-38

Shifting into NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.

4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.

5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

6. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.

7. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LObuttons for 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL light willcome on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRALis complete.

8. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmission toDRIVE (D) for one second.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

10. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

11. Release the parking brake prior to towing.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn theignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shiftposition (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD OR 4LO).

4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRALthe NEUTRAL light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to thedesired position.

Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of thedifferent modes may cause the transfer case to enter theshift protection mode. This will protect the transfer casefrom possible damage and will only allow the transfercase to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfercase may stay in this mode for up to three minutes.

2-39

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedaldown with your right foot. Push down the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the warning light will flashwhen the parking brake is applied and the vehicleis moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at leastthree seconds.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, locatedabove the parking brake pedal, with the parkingbrake symbol, to release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,the brake system warning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-62.

2-40

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow. Withfour-wheel drive, if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, besure the transfer case is in a drive gear — notin NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-62.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position bypulling the shift lever toward you and moving it upas far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — notin NEUTRAL (N).

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-41

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehicle couldmove suddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive and your transfercase is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be freeto roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).So be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear — not in NEUTRAL.

And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running unlessyou have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and theparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After youmove the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 2-41.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-42

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply your regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is in RUN. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-32.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,move the shift lever into the gear you want.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannotshift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shiftinterlock in this key position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

2-43

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannotsee or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strangeor different.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or overroad debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-44.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-40.

2-44

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

{CAUTION:

Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfercase in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, besure the transfer case is in a drive gear — notin NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-41.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-62.

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®, Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this feature. When on, theautomatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level tominimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror has a dual display in the upper right cornerof the mirror face that shows the compass readingand the outside temperature.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are atthe bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System onpage 2-54 for more information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

2-45

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly toturn the compass/temperature display on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to becalibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” following.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, dothe following:

1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximatelyfour seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the display tothe desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, the newunit will be locked in and the compass/temperaturedisplay will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for anextended period of time, please see your GM dealer.Under certain circumstances, a delay in updatingthe temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turnedon automatically each time the ignition is started. Tooperate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to theleft of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not, press andhold the on/off button for approximately six secondsuntil the green light comes on, indicating that themirror is in automatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function bypressing and holding the on/off button forapproximately six seconds, until the green indicatorlight turns off.

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. Itwill be necessary to adjust the compass to compensatefor compass variance if the vehicle is outside of zoneeight. Under certain circumstances, as during a longdistance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance is thedifference between earth’s magnetic north and truegeographic north. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2-46

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and azone number appears in the display. The compassis now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desiredzone number appears in the display. Release thebutton. After approximately four seconds ofinactivity, the new zone number will be locked inand the compass/temperature display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described next.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the display doesnot show a compass heading, N for North, forexample, there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correct headingand the compass zone variance is set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, pushthe on/off button for approximately 12 seconds oruntil CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the displayreads a direction.

2-47

Passenger Air Bag IndicatorThe vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbagindicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.For more information, see Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-32.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may be equipped with this feature. Whenon, an automatic dimming mirror will dim to theproper level to minimize glare from lights behind youafter dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in the upperright corner of the mirror with the compass reading andthe outside temperature. The display can be turnedon or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP orthe COMP button.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressing theTEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,will toggle the temperature reading on and off. Toalternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheitand Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button forapproximately four seconds until the display blinks Fand C. Press and release the TEMP button to togglebetween the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, the display willstop blinking and display the last selection made.

Press and release the TEMP button to toggle thetemperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.

If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult yourGM dealer.

2-48

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationPress and hold the TEMP button for approximatelyeight seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature onor off. The indicator light to the left of the TEMPbutton will turn on or off to indicate when the feature ison. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain offuntil it is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.

Compass OperationPress the COMP button once briefly to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition is started and the compass feature ison, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the compass heading.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.

• After approximately five seconds, the display doesnot show a compass heading, N for North, forexample, there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correct headingand the compass zone variance is set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, pushin the COMP button for approximately eight secondsor until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the displayreads a direction.

2-49

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance if the vehicle isoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, asduring a long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to adjust for compass variance. Compassvariance is the difference between earth’s magneticnorth and true geographic north. If not adjustedto account for compass variance, your compass couldgive false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the COMP button for five secondsuntil a zone number appears in the display.

3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirroruntil the new zone number appears in the display.After you stop pressing the button, the displaywill show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2-50

Passenger Air Bag IndicatorThe mirror may be equipped with a passenger air bagindicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display theword ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when thepassenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-58 for more information.

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on themirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Outside Camper-Type MirrorsIf your vehicle is equipped with outside camper-typemirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clearview of objects behind you.To extend the manual camper mirrors, pull out themirror head to extend it for better visibility. Adjust themirror glass manually to the desired position.To extend the power camper mirrors, move the selectorswitch, located above the mirror control, to the middleposition. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the leftor right side of the mirror control to slide the mirrorheads away or toward the body of the vehicle. Adjustthe mirror glass by using the power mirror switches. SeeOutside Power Mirrors on page 2-51.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

Move the upper selector switch to the left or right tochoose the mirror to be adjusted, then press the dots,located below the selector switch on the four-way controlpad, to adjust the direction of each mirror.

The mirrors may also include a memory function whichworks in conjunction with the memory seats. SeeMemory Seat on page 2-85 for more information.

2-51

Power Folding MirrorsTo fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,located above the mirror control, to the middleposition. The mirror control will illuminate. Press theright or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold themirrors. The mirror will adjust as it folds in and willreposition itself once it is unfolded.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,they may shake or flutter at normal driving speedsand may not stay in the unfolded position. If thishappens, the mirrors need to be reset. See “Resettingthe Power Folding Mirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Folding MirrorsThe power folding mirrors will need to be reset if:

• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normaldriving speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold themat least three times using the mirror controls. This willreset them to their normal detent position.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from thedriver’s seat. It makes things in the mirror appearfarther away than they really are.

2-52

Outside Heated Mirrors

If the vehicle has heatedmirrors, the button to turnthis function on or offis located on the climatecontrol panel.

Press this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice,snow, and condensation.

If the vehicle has a rear window defogger, theheated mirrors will come on when this button ispressed. See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 3-22for more information.

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrorwith Curb View AssistYour vehicle may have this feature.

The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of theheadlamps behind you. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display on page 2-45.

Your vehicle’s mirrors will also be capable of performingthe curb view assist mirror function. This feature willcause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to apreselected position when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowingyou to view the curb when you are parallel parking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and ashort delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/ordriver’s mirror will return to its original position.

To change the preselected tilt position, adjust themirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory asthe tilt position.

This feature can be enabled/disabled through the DriverInformation Center. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-45 for more information.

2-53

OnStar ® SystemOnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in the vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press theOnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Terms and conditions of the Subscription ServiceAgreement can be found at www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com.

OnStar ® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe andSound Plan is included for the first year. You canextend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to theDirections and Connections Plan to meet your needs.For more information, press the OnStar® button to speakto an advisor.

Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Tracking

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• Remote Diagnostics

• Information and Convenience Services

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

2-54

OnStar ® Personal CallingAs an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Callingcapability is available if your hand-held cell phone islost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-freewireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voicecommands with no additional contracts and no additionalroaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®

Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com; or speak to an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorVirtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Callingthat uses minutes to access up-to-date weather andtraffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You arealso able to listen and reply to E-mail through thevehicle’s audio system. Customize your informationprofile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’sguide for more information.

OnStar ® Steering Wheel ControlsA steering wheel control can be used to interact with theOnStar® personal calling feature.

Press the control withthis symbol on thesteering wheel to make aphone call.

When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directorynumbers, press the control, say the number(s), thensay “dial”.

See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.

2-55

HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink® a combined universal transmitterand receiver, provides a way to replace up tothree hand-held transmitters used to activate devicessuch as gate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the Internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

2-56

Programming the HomeLink ®

TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theInternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Programming HomeLink ®

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

2-57

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressedand released.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase allprevious programming.

2-58

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons dothe following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.Do not hold the two outside buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under“Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink ® ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

2-59

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet atwww.homelink.com.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the bottom of thehandle upward.

Center Overhead ConsoleYour vehicle may have an overhead console equippedwith reading lights and a small storage area.

Press the button next to the light to turn it on. Press itagain to turn it off.

Front Armrest Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a center armrest storagecompartment in the front bench seat.

To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latchhandle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let thelid pop up and swing open.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a console compartment withcupholders between the bucket seats.

To open it, press the button and swing the consolelid open.

The rear of the console has a cupholder that swingsdown for the rear seat passenger to use.

2-60

Luggage CarrierYou can load things on top of your vehicle if it hasthis feature.

The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attachedto the roof and may have crossrails which can be movedback and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load tothe siderails or siderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier thatweighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs overthe rear or sides of the vehicle may damage yourvehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slatsas far forward as possible and against the side rails,making sure to fasten it securely.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity whenloading your vehicle. For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-46.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,check now and then to make sure the luggage andcargo are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut apiece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrailsand siderails to spread the load. If plywood isused, tie it to the siderail supports.

• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderailsupports. Use the crossrails only to keep the loadfrom sliding. To move the crossrails, pull out on thelatch release handle at each end. Slide the crossrailto the desired position balancing the force side toside. Push the release handle back into the latchedposition and slide the crossrail back and forth slightlyto be sure the latch snaps securely into place.

• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrailsas far apart as they will go. Tie the load to thecrossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Alsotie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load sotightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.

• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely lockedinto the siderail.

Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.

If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, careshould be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.

Rear Storage AreaYour vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest/cupholderfor the rear seat passengers.

To open it, pull up and then out on the tab, located atthe top center of the armrest, and pull the armrest down.

2-61

Cargo Cover Panels

{CAUTION:

Improperly stored cargo cover panels could bethrown about the vehicle during a collision orsudden maneuver. You or others could beinjured. If you remove a panel, always storeit in the proper storage location. When youput it back, always be sure that is securelyreattached.

Notice: Exceeding the weight limit of 250 lbs(113 kg) can damage the cargo covers, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty. Donot put anything on top of the cargo covers overthe weight limit.Your vehicle may be equipped with a three-piece cargocover system. The cargo panels can be removedand stored in the cargo area of the vehicle with thecargo panel storage bag.To remove a cargo panel(s), do the following:

1. Lower the tailgate. Use the ignition/door key tounlock the tailgate if it is locked. See Tailgate onpage 2-22 for more information on the tailgate.

Before removing the cargo panel(s), notice thenumbers embossed on the upper center portion ofeach panel. The panels are labeled 1, 2 and 3.There are also numbered labels on the bottom ofthe panels. The numbers on the top and bottom ofthe panels will be used as reference whenremoving, storing and reinstalling the panels.

2-62

2. Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and rightcargo panel latches, located on the bottom of eachcargo panel, toward you to unlock the cargopanel latches.

3. Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the siderails and set it aside. You only need to remove asmany cargo panels as needed for your cargocarrying needs.

4. Remove cargo panel 2 (if you need to) in the sameway and set it aside.

2-63

5. Remove cargo panel 1 (if you need to), but noticethat there are four latches to release (two left-sidelatches and two right-side latches). Set thepanel aside.

After you have removed each cargo panel you can storeit within the cargo storage area using the cargo panelstorage system.

Cargo Panel Storage SystemThe three cargo panels can be stored on either thedriver’s or passenger’s side of the cargo box using thestorage bag. To store the panels, do the following:

2-64

1. Secure the storage bagin the cargo storagearea by attachingthe four clips on thecargo bag to thetie-down locations oneither side of thestorage area.

Always use the storage bag to store the cargopanels during driving.Before storing the cargo panels, be sure that thelatches are in the locked position. The latches are inthe locked position when they are parallel to thefront and back edge of the panel.

Use the following instructions for the proper storagesequence and location for each panel:

Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded

2-65

2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panelwith latches at the top of the bag and facing awayfrom you.

3. Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel withlatches down and facing toward you.

2-66

4. Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel withlatches at the top of the bag and facing toward you.

5. Zip the bag shut.

6. Tighten both straps on the bag by pulling on thefree end of the straps.

2-67

7. Close both top and bottom lever locks at the centerof the bag to secure tightly.

Reinstalling the Cargo Cover PanelsYou only need to reinstall as many cargo panels asyou wish.

1. Remove the cargo panel(s) from the storage bag.You can either leave the bag attached to the sideof the cargo area while it is not in use, or youcan store it outside of the vehicle.

2. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in theunlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on the cargoarea rails while holding the back of the cargopanel up.

2-68

Push the panel forward until it is snug against themidgate and then let the back of the panel downbeing sure that the pegs align with the receivers. 3. Push both left latches away from you to lock the

latches (remember that there are two latches oneach side for panel 1). You should hear a click wheneach latch locks correctly. Lock the remainingtwo right latches on panel 1.For any cargo cover panel you must lock the leftlatch in place before you can lock the right latch. Ifyou do not follow this exactly, the cargo coverpanels may not lock in place correctly.

Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar

2-69

4. Install cargo cover 2 next. Place the latches in theunlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel onthe cargo area rails while holding the back ofthe cargo panel up.

Push the panel forward until it is snug against theother panel and then let the back of the panel downbeing sure that the pegs align with the receivers.

5. Push the latches away from you, starting with theleft latch, to lock the panel in place. You shouldhear a click when each latch locks correctly.

6. Install cargo cover 3 next. Place the latches in theunlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel onthe cargo area rails while holding the back ofthe cargo panel up.


2-70

Push the panel forward until it is snug against theother panel and then let the back of the panel downbeing sure that the pegs align with the receivers. 7. Push the latches away from you, starting with the

left latch, to lock the panel in place. You shouldhear a click when each latch locks correctly.


2-71

Cargo Tie Downs

There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area thatyou can use to strap cargo in.

The tie downs are also used to secure the cargo coverpanel storage bag or the tonneau cover storage bagif your vehicle is equipped with either. For moreinformation see “Cargo Cover Panels” earlier in thissection and Tonneau Cover on page 2-78.

All-Weather Cargo AreaYour vehicle has the ability to operate in many differentconfigurations (cargo panels on or off, midgate up ordown, rear glass in or out), allowing the cargo andpassenger area to be open to the environment. To allowthe vehicle to operate in these configurations, it isequipped with features to help it resist the elements andprotect cargo inside the cargo area. Parts of thewater management system, which is designed to quicklydirect water out of the cargo box, are the top draingrates, side rail channels, catch cups, midgate drain,cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo mat.

2-72

Even when the water management system is workingproperly and the cover system is on, there may be someinstances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)when water may be present in the following areas:

A. Top drain gratesB. Removable front drain grate (Midgate drain gate)C. Side rail channels and catch cups

D. Front drainsE. Water drainage area (around both sides of the box

and the tailgate side)F. Rear drainsG. Cargo floorH. Cargo mat (central area of mat is intended to be dry)

Maintenance and CleaningTo ensure that the water management system performsproperly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate and coversystem are fully closed and that each element ofthe water management system is clean and not blockedwith debris. Follow the instruction given next in thissection for the proper procedures on cleaning each itemof the water management system.

2-73

Top Drain Grates – Removaland Cleaning

The top drain grates are located near the rear glass onboth sides of the vehicle. You may need to clean thegrates and drains if there seems to be blockage.

To remove each drain grate, do the following:

1. Remove the cargo panels or tonneau cover. SeeCargo Cover Panels on page 2-62 or TonneauCover on page 2-78 for more information.

2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out fromthe vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.

2-74

To replace the drain grate do the following:

1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots inthe grate.

2. When you are sure that the clips are aligned withthe slots, push the grate down firmly.

The grate should clip into place. Don’t force the grate ifit won’t clip into place; realign the clips with the holesand try again.

Side Rail Channels

The side rail channels are located on top of both sidesof the cargo area. You may want to flush them outwith clean water if you notice any debris collecting insideof them.

When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful notto damage the rails.

2-75

Midgate Drain Grate Removaland Cleaning

The midgate drain grate is located near the base of themidgate in the cargo area. You will find a removabledrain grate covering the drain.

After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. you willneed to flush the midgate drain with water. But first youwill have to remove the drain grate by using thefollowing steps:

1. Lower the midgate. See Midgate on page 2-13 formore information.

2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate.

3. Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull itstraight out.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.

2-76

Cargo Area Floor Drains

Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drainslocated under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargoarea. These drains should be cleaned periodically toallow water to exit the cargo area.

The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can flushthe drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo areais extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargofloor mat or take the whole mat out and flush thedrains with water.

Top-Box Storage

Your vehicle is equipped with top-box storage units onboth side of the vehicle. The passenger side topbox contains the tools you will need to change aflat tire.

Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock it. Press the keycylinder button and swing the lid open. Turn on thecargo lamps (if equipped) if you need more light inside.See “Cargo Lamps” under Exterior Lamps onpage 3-14 for more information on cargo lamps.

2-77

Tonneau Cover

{CAUTION:

Improperly stored tonneau cover componentscould be thrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver. You or otherscould be injured. If you remove the cover,bows and rails, always store them properly inthe cargo area.

When you put them back, always be sure thatthey are securely reattached.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a tonneau cover.The main components of the tonneau cover arethe following:

A. Front RailB. BowsC. Side Rails

D. Rear RailE. Plastic LipF. Loop

2-78

Removing the Tonneau Cover

1. Starting at the rear corner of the driver’s side of thevehicle, pull the loop (F) toward you and then pullup so the plastic lip (E) releases from the channel inthe rear rail (D) and the side rail (C).

2. Pull the back of the cover out from the rear rail (D).

2-79

3. Roll the cover toward the front of the vehicle. Theplastic lip (E) will release from the siderails (C) asyou roll the cover forward.

4. Stow the cover using the buckles and the strapsattached to the front rail.

You can also store the tonneau cover outside of thevehicle or use the storage bag included.

2-80

To use the storage bag, do the following:

1. Attach the bag to the cargo tie downs as shown.Unzip the top of the storage bag.

2. With the tonneau cover rolled up, place it inthe proper compartment in the bag and zip thebag shut.

2-81

Removing the Front/Rear Railsand BowsBefore moving on to the next step, you will want toattach the storage bag to the cargo tie downs, if it is notalready attached, so you will have a place ready tostore the front and back rails and the two bows.

1. Remove the rear rail by pulling it straight out fromthe side rails. Set the rail aside.

2. Remove the two bowsby gently pushing themagainst thespring-loaded end. Setthe bow aside.

3. With the midgate lowered, enter the rear passengercompartment of the vehicle. See Midgate onpage 2-13.

2-82

4. Remove the front rail by first twisting up the edgenearest you, to clear the midgate seals, and thenpulling it out from the side rails.

5. Stow both bows and the front and rear rails in thestorage bag. When all components of the tonneaucover are secured in the bag properly, zip thebag shut.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tonneau coverusing the following suggestions:• When reinstalling the front rail, start by holding the

back edge of the rail up and then twisting the backedge down while pushing it into place.

• Both bows are the same size and thereforeinterchangeable.

• When placing the bows in the side rails, it is easiestto place the spring-loaded bow end in first.

2-83

• When placing thebows, locate thesmall notches (arrow)in the side rails.These notches receivethe tang on the bowends and help the bowsseat into place.

• When reinstalling the tonneau cover, start at thefront, near the cab. Place the plastic lip into thefront rail, then the rear rail, and finish with theside rails.

To clean the tonneau cover, use mild soap and water. Ifnecessary, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirttrapped in the grain of the material.

Sunroof

The vehicle may be equipped with a power slidingsunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignitionneeds to be on or RAP needs to be active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-29.

Press and release the rear side of the button located inthe front overhead console to express-open the glasspanel and sunshade. To close the glass panel,press and hold the front of the button. The glass will notbe fully seated unless the button is held until theglass stops moving. With the sunroof closed, press theforward side of the button to open the sunroof to thevent position.

2-84

The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade whichcan be pulled forward to block sun rays.

If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroofglass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stopat the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed, theglass panel can be closed or opened.

Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periodsof time as debris may collect in the tracks.

If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or isnot working, the sunroof may need to be reprogrammed.To do this, start the vehicle and press the forwardside of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves toa fully closed position. Release, and press again tomove to the vent position which occurs when the sunroofis fully tilted rearward. This will reset the memory andenable the sunroof to function properly.

Vehicle Personalization

Memory Seat

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls forthe memory functionare located on thedriver’s door.

These buttons are used to program and recall memorysettings for the driver’s seat, throttle and brakepedals and both the driver’s and passenger’s outsidemirrors. The settings for these features can be saved forup to two drivers.

2-85

To store the settings, do the following:

1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’sseat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, andside wing area, throttle and brake pedals andboth of the outside mirrors to your preference.

2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memorycontrol for three seconds. A double chime willsound to let you know that the position hasbeen stored.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow thepreceding steps, but press the other numberedmemory control button.

Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released whilethe vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound andthe memory position will be recalled.

To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature atany time, press one of the memory buttons or powerseat controls.

Easy Exit SeatThe controls for this memory function are located on thedriver’s door.

B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to programand recall the desired driver’s seat position whenexiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position can besaved for up to two drivers.

To store the seat exit position, do the following:

1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat willmove to the stored memory position.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.

3. Press and hold the exit button of the memorycontrol for three seconds. A double chime will soundto let you know that the position has been storedfor the selected button (1 or 2).

To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow thepreceding steps, but press the other numberedmemory control button.

To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:

• Press the exit button on the memory control.

• Or, if this feature is activated in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), removing the key fromthe ignition will move the seat to the exit position.

See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customizationon page 3-58 for more information on activating thisfeature in the DIC.

2-86

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9Windshield Washer .......................................3-10Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .........................3-17Exterior Cargo Lamps ....................................3-17Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-18Reading Lamps ............................................3-18Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19

Climate Controls ............................................3-20Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-20Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-22Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-27

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-28Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-29Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-30Tachometer .................................................3-30Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-30Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-31Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-32Charging System Light ..................................3-33Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-34Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-35Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-36Traction Off Light ..........................................3-36Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-37Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-38Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-39Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-42Security Light ...............................................3-43Cruise Control Light ......................................3-43Highbeam On Light .......................................3-43Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-44Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-44

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-46DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-49DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-58

Audio System(s) .............................................3-64Setting the Time ...........................................3-64Radio with CD ..............................................3-65Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-75Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-89Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-100

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-100Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-102Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-102Radio Reception .........................................3-103Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-104Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-104Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-104XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-104Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-104

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27.B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 3-14.C. Cargo/Top-Box Lamps Button. See Exterior Cargo

Lamps on page 3-17.D. Automatic Transfer Case Buttons (If Equipped). See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-35. Traction AssistSystem (If Equipped). See Traction Assist System(TAS) on page 4-8. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped).See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

E. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons (IfEquipped). See OnStar® System on page 2-54 andAudio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-102.

F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-29.

G. Shift Lever/Tow/Haul Selector Button. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 2-32 and Tow/HaulMode on page 2-35.

H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-64.I. Dome Override Button. See Dome Lamps on

page 3-18.

J. Fog Lamps Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.K. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-12.M. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.N. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver

Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.O. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on

page 2-40.P. Climate Control Systems. See Dual Automatic

Climate Control System on page 3-22 and DualClimate Control System on page 3-20.

Q. Lighter (If Equipped) or Accessory Power Outlet (IfEquipped). See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighteron page 3-19 and Accessory Power Outletson page 3-19.

R. Accessory Power Outlet (If Equipped). SeeAccessory Power Outlets on page 3-19.

S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-60.

3-5

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on top of thesteering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not in theignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.

3-6

Tilt WheelThe tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steeringwheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when you enterand exit the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of thesteering column under the turn signal lever.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull thelever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortablelevel, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. Turn and

Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. Headlamp

High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on

page 3-9.• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on

page 3-9.• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer

on page 3-10.• I Cruise Control. Cruise Control on page 3-10.

For information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 3-14 later in this section.

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-106and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-109.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of theturn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON willalso appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and messageoff, move the turn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): Tochange the headlamps from low to high beam, push thelever toward the instrument panel. To return tolow-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever towardyou. Then release it.

When the high beams areon, this indicator light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.

3-8

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlampsto signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.It works even if your headlamps are in theautomatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, thenrelease it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position or onlow beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.The high-beam indicator on the instrument panelcluster will come on. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning the bandwith the wiper symbol on it.

8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band tomist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. Thewipers will stop after one wipe. If you want morewipes, hold the band on mist longer.

N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long orshort delay between wipes. This can be very usefulin light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delaytime. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorterthe delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band away from you to the first solid band pastthe delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn theband further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomeworn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

3-9

Windshield Washer

L(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with thewindshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunctionlever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, pushthe paddle. The wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or return to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

Cruise Control

9(Off): This positionturns the system off.

R(On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbolto make the vehicle accelerate or resume to apreviously set speed.

3-10

T(Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise light on theinstrument panel willilluminate when the cruisecontrol is engaged.

3-11

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course,disengages the cruise control. But you do not need toreset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehiclewill keep going faster until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do nothold the switch at resume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the acceleratorpedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed. Ifthe accelerator pedal is held longer than60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you

reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe set button. Each time you do this, you will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

3-12

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may want to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and do notuse cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal,

• move the cruise control switch to off, or

• shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature, cruisecontrol will turn off if road conditions causeStabiliTrak® to activate.

• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

The cruise control will turn off automatically if thetraction control system or StabiliTrak® system activate,if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-13

Exterior Lamps

The control on the driver’s side of your instrument paneloperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has four positions:

9(Off): Turn the knob to this position and release it toturn off all exterior lamps including the DRL. To turn anylamps back on when in the off mode, turn the knob to thedesired lamp mode. To return to the AUTO mode, turnthe knob to the off position and release it. The off orAUTO mode will also cancel and the lamps will return tothe AUTO when the vehicle is turned off. This mode is notavailable for vehicles sold in Canada.

AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put thesystem into automatic headlamp mode. The DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is lightenough outside.

;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are inAUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain onfor a set time. You can change this delay time using theDIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.

You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beamby pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever towardthe instrument panel.

3-14

Headlamps on ReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when yourheadlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on andyour key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turnthe headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on. Inthe AUTO mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delayends (if enabled in the DIC).

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,

• the transmission is not in PARK (P), and

• the light sensor determines it is daytime.

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t beon. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlampsystem will switch from DRL to the headlamps.As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside and the headlampswitch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system willturn on your headlamps at the normal brightnessalong with other lamps such as the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and theinstrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn theexterior lamps switch to the off position and thenrelease. Turning off the automatic headlamp systemwith the headlamp switch is not available for vehiclesfirst sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,you can turn off the automatic headlamp systemwhen parked at night by applying the parking brakebefore starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remainoff once the vehicle is started for as long as you areparked. If you release the parking brake, the lights willturn on. If the parking brake is not released beforeyou begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above2 mph (3.2 km/h).

3-15

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of theinstrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or thesystem will be on whenever the ignition is on.The system may also turn on your headlamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather or a tunnel. This is normal.There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems sothat driving under bridges or bright overhead streetlights does not affect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp system will only be affected whenthe light sensor sees a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 3-17.

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them forbetter vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parkinglamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on foryour fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp button islocated on the left side ofyour instrument panel.

Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while theheadlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the buttonagain to turn them off. An indicator light will glownear the button when the fog lamps are on.

Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as muchlight as your headlamps. Never use your fog lampsin the dark without turning on the headlamps.

The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beamheadlamps come on. When the high beams go off, thefog lamps will come on again.

The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition isturned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after yourestart the vehicle, you will need to press the foglamp button again.

3-16

Auxiliary Roof Mounted LampIf your vehicle has this feature, this button includeswiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified servicecenter to install an auxiliary roof lamp.

This button is locatedon the center of theinstrument panel nearthe comfort controls.

When the button wiring is connected to an auxiliaryroof-mounted lamp, pressing the button will activatethe lamp and illuminate an indicator light near thebutton. Pressing the button again will turn off the roofmounted lamp.

If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may havethe snow plow prep package. For further information seeAdding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment onpage 4-52.

Exterior Cargo LampsYou can use the cargo lamps if you need more light inthe cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-boxstorage units. Some vehicles will only have a cargolamp in the passenger side top box.

Press the button, with thissymbol to turn the cargolamps on or off.

The cargo lamps symbol light will come on in theinstrument panel cluster when the cargo lamps are onand the ignition key is turned to run.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe thumbwheel for this feature is located next to theexterior lamps control.

D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheelup or down to brighten or dim the instrument panellights and the radio display. This will only work ifthe headlamps or parking lamps are on.To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doorsclosed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.

3-17

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when you open a door orthe midgate, if equipped, and will turn off when alldoors or midgate are closed.

You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning thethumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, allthe way up. In this position, the dome lamps willremain on whether a door is opened or closed.

E (Dome Override): Press this button, located belowthe exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off evenwhile a door is opened. To return the lamps to automaticoperation, press the button again and it will return tothe out position. In this position, the dome lampswill come on when you open a door.

Entry/Exit LightingYour vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exitfeature.

When a door is opened or the key is removed from theignition, the dome lamps will come on if the domeoverride button is in the out position.

Reading Lamps

If your vehicle has readinglamps, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp toturn it on or off. Thelamps can be adjusted topoint in the directionyou want.

Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in otherlocations. To turn on or off, press the button located nextto the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.

3-18

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left onfor more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in lock.This will keep your battery from running down.

Accessory Power OutletsYour vehicle may be equipped with two accessorypower outlets located on the instrument panel.

Your vehicle may also have an outlet on the back of thecenter console above the cupholder door.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatibleto the accessory power outlets and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional information onthe accessory power plugs.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterIf your vehicle has this feature it is located in the centerconsole or on the instrument panel. Pull up on theashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull thedoor open it if it is on the instrument panel.

Notice: If you put papers or other flammable itemsin the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them and possibly damageyour vehicle. Never put flammable items in theashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console orfrom the slide out door. To reinstall the ashtray,slide it back to the original position.

To use the cigarette lighter, if equipped, push it in allthe way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do notuse anything other than the cigarette lighter in theheating element.

3-19

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.

9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan. Ifthe knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle,and will be directed based on the position of themode knob. The temperature can also be adjustedusing the temperature levers.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise todirect the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel vents.

)(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to theinstrument panel vents; then directs most of theremaining air to the floor vents. A little air is directedtoward the windshield and the side window vents. Coolerair is directed to the upper vents and warmer air tothe floor vents.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor vents with a little air directed to the windshield andthe side window vents.

h (Recirculation): The recirculation mode is usedto recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use thismode to help prevent outside odors and/or dustfrom entering your vehicle or to help cool the air insideof your vehicle more quickly. Press this button toturn the recirculation mode on or off. The light on therecirculation button will illuminate. Recirculation cannotbe used in floor, blend or defrost modes. An indicatoron the button will light up, flash three times and turn offwhen recirculation is selected in these modes. Theair-conditioning compressor will also come on when thismode is activated. While in recirculation mode thewindows may fog when the weather is cold and damp.To clear the fog, select either the blend or defrostmode and increase fan speed.

3-20

Temperature Control

Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climatecontrol panel is used to raise or lower the temperatureon the driver’s side of the vehicle. This lever alsoadjusts the temperature to the center console outlets(if equipped).

Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of theclimate control panel is used to raise or lower thetemperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. When the button ispressed, an indicator light will come on and thesystem will begin to cool and dehumidify the air insideof your vehicle. You may notice a slight change inengine performance when the air conditioningcompressor shuts off and turns on again. Thisis normal.

Defogging and DefrostingThere are two modes to choose from to clear fog orfrost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise toselect one of the following modes:

-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the flooroutlets, windshield and the side window vents. The airconditioning compressor will run automatically todehumidify the air to prevent window fogging. Therecirculation mode cannot be selected while in thedefog mode.

1(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and the side window vents, with only alittle air directed to the floor vents. The air conditioningcompressor will run automatically to dehumidify theair to prevent window fogging. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in defrost mode.

3-21

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has a rear defogger, the lines you see onthe rear window warm the glass. The rear windowdefogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will automatically turn offseveral minutes after the button is pressed. Pressing thebutton while the defogger is running can also turn offthe defogger.

If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors thisbutton will activate them.

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system, you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation in your vehicle.

You can select different climate control settings for thedriver and passengers.

3-22

Driver’s Side Temperature KnobThe driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperatureof the air coming through the system on the driver’sside. The temperature can be adjusted even if thesystem is turned off. This is possible since outside airwill always flow through the system as the vehicleis moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower orincrease the cabin temperature. The display will showthe temperature setting decreasing or increasing and anarrow pointing to the driver will be displayed underand to the left of the temperature setting.

Passenger’s Side Temperature KnobThe passenger’s side knob can be used to change thetemperature of the air coming through the systemon the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperaturecan be adjusted even if the system is turned off. Thisis possible since outside air will always flow through thesystem as the vehicle is moving forward unless it isset to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower orincrease the cabin temperature. The display will showthe temperature setting decreasing or increasing and anarrow pointing to the passenger will be displayedunder and to the right of the temperature setting.

The passenger’s temperature setting can be set tomatch the driver’s temperature setting by pressing andholding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both thedriver and passenger arrows will be displayed.

3-23

Automatic OperationAUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive the system will control the inside temperature, theair delivery, and the fan speed.Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display will change toshow the current driver’s set temperature, deliverymode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button againwithin five seconds to display the passenger’s settemperature.If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settingsare the same when AUTO is pressed, thetemperature setting and both arrows will bedisplayed for five seconds along with the automaticair delivery mode and fan speed. After thefive second update, the display will change to showthe temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.If the driver’s and passenger’s temperaturesettings are not the same, the opposite sidetemperature setting will be displayed for anadditional five seconds. To make the passenger’stemperature the same as the driver’s press and holdthe AUTO button for about four seconds.When auto is selected, the air conditioning operationand air inlet will be automatically controlled. Theair conditioning compressor will run when the

outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). Theair inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’shot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch torecirculate inside air to help quickly cool downyour vehicle. The light on the button will illuminatein recirculation.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)temperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s orpassenger’s side temperature knob to adjust thetemperature setting as necessary. If you choose thetemperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the systemwill remain at the maximum cooling setting. If youchoose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.Choosing either maximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool any faster.Be careful not to cover the sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperature based on sunload, and also turns on your headlamps.To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem will delay turning on the fan until warm air isavailable. The length of delay depends on theengine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switchwill override this delay and change the fan to aselected speed.

3-24

9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climatecontrol system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, andwill be directed to the floor. This direction can be changedby pressing the mode button. The temperature can alsobe adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the upor down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, theAUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn thesystem on when it is off.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

w9x (Fan): The switch with the fan symbol allowsyou to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the uparrow to increase fan speed and the down arrowto decrease fan speed.

Pressing this button when the system is off will turn thesystem on.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually change thedirection of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing thebutton until the desired mode appears on the display.

If you press the mode button to select an air deliverymode, the display will change to show you the selectedair mode delivery. The display will then show thecurrent status of the system. When the system is turnedoff, the display will go blank after displaying thecurrent status of the system.

H (Panel): This setting will deliver air to theinstrument panel outlets.

)(Bi-Level): This setting will deliver warmer air to thefloor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.

6 (Floor): This setting will deliver air to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later inthis section.

@(Recirculation): Press this button to limit theamount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light onthe recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when youare trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and formaximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.Press this button again to allow outside air to enter thevehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.

Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculationfeature. To resume the auto recirculation function, pressthe AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, thesystem will revert to the auto recirculation function.

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,the light in the button will flash and then go out to let youknow that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps toprevent fogging.

3-25

When the weather is cool or damp, operating the systemin recirculation for extended periods of time may causefogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, selecteither defog or front defrost.

You may also notice that the A/C compressor will runwhile in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps toprevent fogging.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the airconditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. Thesnowflake symbol will appear on the display when theA/C is on and will turn off when the air conditioning is off.

Pressing this button when the outside temperature istoo cool for air conditioning to be effective will make thesnowflake symbol flash three times and then turn offto let you know that the air conditioning mode isnot available. If the air conditioning is on and the outsidetemperature drops below a temperature which is toocool for air conditioning to be effective, the snowflakesymbol will turn off to let you know that the airconditioning mode has been canceled.

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, thesystem will run the air conditioning automatically to cooland dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you selectA/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation, theA/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/Ccompressor will still run to help prevent fogging.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes foryour vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windowsclosed for the air conditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while using manual operationof the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to the instrumentpanel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn thetemperature knob to the desired setting.

In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify theair inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, thesystem will maximize its performance by usingrecirculation as necessary.

9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climatecontrol system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,and will be directed to the floor. This direction canbe changed by pressing the mode button. Thetemperature can also be adjusted using eithertemperature knob. Press the up or down arrows onthe fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, orthe air conditioning button to turn the system onwhen it is off.

3-26

Defogging and DefrostingYou can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog orfrost from your windshield. Use the defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the frontdefrost button to defrost the front windshield.

-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fogor moisture. Press the mode button to select thissetting. This setting will deliver air to the floor andwindshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Press this button to defrost thewindshield. The system will automatically control the fanspeed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If theoutside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your airconditioning compressor will automatically run tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on therear window warm the glass. The rear windowdefogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from therear window.

<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed. If you need additionalwarming time, press the button again.

If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors thisbutton will activate them.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet AdjustmentYour vehicle has air outlets located in the center and onthe side of your instrument panel that allow you to adjustthe direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel nextto or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For themost efficient airflow and temperature control, keep theoutlet in the fully opened position.

3-27

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,

or any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulate throughoutyour vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affectthe performance of the heating and air conditioningsystem. Check with your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of your vehicle.

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly – and even dangerous. So please get to knowyour warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a message center that worksalong with the warning lights and gages. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-45.

3-28

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fastyou’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely andeconomically.

United States 2500 series shown, 1500 series and Canada similar

3-29

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A and TripB odometer. See “Trip Information” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-46.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one will be set to the correct mileage total of theold odometer.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime willbe provided for several seconds to remind people tobuckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light willalso be provided and stay on for several seconds,then it will flash for several more. You should buckleyour seat belt.

If your vehicle is notequipped with thepassenger sensing system,this chime and light will berepeated if the driverremains unbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-58 formore information.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor thelight will come on.

3-30

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensors, theairbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-49.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Then thelight should go out. Thismeans the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, yourairbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have your vehicleserviced right away if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-31

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorIf your vehicle has the passenger sensing systemyour rearview mirror will have a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, thepassenger airbag status indicator will light ON andOFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, after several more seconds,

the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or eitherthe on or off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you have arear-facing child restraint installed in the rightfront passenger’s seat, it means that thepassenger sensing system has not turned offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in arear-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat unless the airbag has been turned off.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada

3-32

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-58for more on this, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbagsystem. If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-31.

Charging System Light

The charging system lightwill come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition,but the engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, you may have aproblem with the charging system. It could indicatethat you have problems with a generator drive belt, oranother electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. Driving while this light is on could drainyour battery.

When this light comes on the DIC will also display thebattery not charging message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-49.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, becertain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

3-33

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is notrunning, but the ignition isin RUN, this gageshows your battery’s stateof charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The gage maytransition from a higher to lower or a lower to higherreading, this is normal. Readings between the low andhigh warning zones indicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when alarge number of electrical accessories are operating inthe vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for anextended period. This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able to provide full powerat engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself as higher engine speedsallow the charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with the readingin either warning zone. If you must drive, turn offall unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

3-34

Brake System Warning LightWith the ignition on, the brake system warning lightwill flash when you set the parking brake. The light willflash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If youtry to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chimewill sound when the vehicle speed is greater than3 mph (5 km/h).

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, youneed both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds therecould be a brake problem. Have your brake systeminspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push or may go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-56.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light is on.Driving with the brake system warning light oncan lead to an accident. If the light is still onafter you have pulled off the road and stoppedcarefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

United States Canada

3-35

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light will comeon when you start yourengine and may stay on forseveral seconds.

That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. You will also hear achime sound when the light is on steady. If the regularbrake system warning light isn’t on, you still havebrakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem withyour regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you willalso hear a chime sound on the first occurrence ofa problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and thenrestarted. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-35.

Traction Off Light

If you have the TractionAssist System or theStabiliTrak® system, thislight should come on brieflywhen you turn theignition to RUN.

If the light doesn’t come on then, the system mayrequire service; have it fixed so it will be there to warnyou if the system is turned off.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,there may be a problem with your Traction AssistSystem and your vehicle may need service. When thislight is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

The traction off light may come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TASon/off button located to the left of the steering wheel,the light will come on and stay on. To turn thesystem back on, press the button again; the lightshould go off.

3-36

• If you move the shift lever to FIRST (1), the lightwill come on and stay on to indicate that thetraction system is off. This is normal operation. Toturn the system back on, move the shift leverback to a position other than FIRST (1); the lightshould go off. See Traction Assist System (TAS) onpage 4-8.

• The light will come on and stay on if the TASautomatic engagement feature has been turned off.To turn the system on, press the TAS off/onbutton; the light should go off. To turn the automaticengagement feature back on, see Traction AssistSystem (TAS) on page 4-8.

• If the Traction Assist System is affected by ananti-lock brake system, TAS or engine-relatedproblem, the system will turn off and the light willcome on. Have your vehicle serviced.

• If the vehicle is driven over an extremely roughroad, the system will turn off and the light willcome on. The light will go off a few seconds afterthe rough road conditions go away or whenthe vehicle comes to a complete stop. This isnormal operation.

For more information on the traction off light andStabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle isworking. During a majority of the operation, the gagewill read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a loador going up hills, it is normal for the temperature tofluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If thegage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.


3-37

Transmission Temperature Gage

Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmissiontemperature gage.

When your ignition is on, the gage shows thetemperature of the transmission fluid. The normaloperating range is from 180°F (82°C) to about200°F (93°C).

At approximately 265°F (130°C), the driver informationcenter will display a TRANSMISSION HOT messageand the transmission will enter a transmission protectionmode. When the transmission enters the protection

mode, you may notice a change in the transmissionshifting patterns. The transmission will return to normalshifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperaturefalls below 260°F (127°C).

See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45 forfurther information.

If your vehicle has an Allison transmission, and the fluidreaches temperatures of approximately 275°F (135°C)or greater, the driver information center will displaya TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message and achime will sound until the temperature falls below265°F (129°C). Pull the vehicle off the roadway when itis safe to do so. Set the parking brake, place thetransmission in PARK (P) and allow the engine toidle until the transmission temperature falls below265°F (129°C). If the transmission continues to operateabove 265°F (130°C), contact your nearest dealer orthe GM Roadside Assistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle with thetransmission temperature gage above normaloperating range, you can damage the transmission.This could lead to costly repairs that would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle while the transmission temperature gagereading is above normal. See your dealer for service.


3-38

The following situations can cause the transmission tooperate at higher temperatures:• Towing a trailer• Hot outside air temperatures• Vehicle overloading• Hauling a large or heavy load• Low transmission fluid level• High transmission fluid level• Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary

transmission oil cooler (if equipped).A temporary solution to hotter transmission operatingtemperatures may be to let the transmission cool down. Ifthe transmission is operated at higher temperatures on afrequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after awhile, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good, and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

3-39

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-9. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

3-40

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and yourvehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack ofOBD system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-41

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure inpsi (pounds per square inch) when the engine isrunning. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure inkPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by adangerously low oil level or some other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil on page 5-17.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.


3-42

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turn thekey toward START.The light will stay on untilthe engine starts.

If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered atamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®

on page 2-27.

If the light comes on continuously while driving andstays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®

system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,and you should see your dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 foradditional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off.See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

3-43

Tow/Haul Mode LightThis light is displayedwhen the tow/haul modehas been activated.

For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing a Trailer on page 4-62.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you abouthow much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you areout of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soonas possible.

Here are some situations you may experience with yourfuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with thefuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thefuel gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less than half the tank’scapacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off theignition.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly whenyou are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel onpage 5-5.


3-44

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is locatedon the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.The DIC buttons, if equipped, are located on thesteering wheel. The DIC can display information suchas the trip odometer, fuel economy, customizationfeatures and warning/status messages.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steeringwheel buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.You will scroll through the odometer, trip odometerand engine hours by pressing the trip odometer resetstem located on the instrument panel cluster. Youwill also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages bypressing the trip odometer reset stem. See Speedometerand Odometer on page 3-30 for information onfeatures for vehicles without DIC buttons.

A3 (Trip Information): Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure for vehiclesequipped with a tire pressure monitor, timer andengine hours.

B r (Fuel Information): Press this button to displaythe current range, fuel used, average fuel economy andengine oil life.

C 4 (Customization): Press this button to access thevehicle settings menu and customize the personalsettings on your vehicle.

Dr (Select): Press this button to reset certain DICfunctions and set your customization settings.

Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledgeDIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.

3-45

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will displaythe information that was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC has different modes which can be accessed bypressing the four DIC buttons located on the steeringwheel. These buttons are trip information, fuelinformation, customization and select. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following pages.

Trip Information Button

3 (Trip Information): Press the trip informationbutton to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,TRIP B, TIMER and ENGINE HOURS.

Odometer: Press the trip information button untilODOMETER appears on the display. This mode showsthe total distance the vehicle has been driven ineither miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stemlocated on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off willalso display the odometer.

Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP Aappears on the display. This mode shows the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in eithermiles or kilometers.

Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP Bappears on the display. This mode shows the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in eithermiles or kilometers.

To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and holdthe select button for one second while in one of thetrip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A orTRIP B.

You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they aredisplayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. Ifyou press and hold the reset stem or the selectbutton for four seconds, the display will show thedistance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP Aor TRIP B.

3-46

Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press theselect button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.The display will show the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was last reset, not including timethe ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will roll back to zero.

To stop the counting of time, press the select buttonbriefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the selectbutton while TIMER is displayed.

Engine Hours: Press the trip information button untilENGINE HOURS appears on the display. Thismode shows the total number of hours the engine hasrun. Pressing and holding the reset stem located onthe instrument cluster for about four seconds will alsodisplay the engine hour information after the odometer isdisplayed when the vehicle is off.

Fuel Information Button

t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel informationbutton to scroll through the range, fuel used, averagefuel economy and the engine oil life system.

Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button untilRANGE appears on the display. This mode shows theremaining distance you can drive without refueling.It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining inthe tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel levelis low.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range isan average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button untilFUEL USED appears on the display. This mode showsthe number of gallons or liters of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the select button for onesecond while FUEL USED is displayed.

3-47

Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel informationbutton until AVG ECON appears on the display.This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past driving conditions.

Press and hold the select button for one secondwhile AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fueleconomy. Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fuel economyis not reset, it will be continually updated each timeyou drive.

Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel informationbutton until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.The engine oil life system shows an estimate of theoil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when thesystem is reset after an oil change. It will alert youto change your oil on a schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system, use the fuelbutton to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen andthen press and hold the select button for five secondswhile ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE

RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to letyou know the system is reset. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-20 for more information.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See EngineOil on page 5-17 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-4.

Customization Button

4(Customization): Press the customization button toaccess the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customizethe settings to your vehicle. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-58 for more information.

Select Button

r (Select): Press the select button to reset certainDIC functions and set your customization settings.For example, this button will reset the trip odometersand scroll through the languages in which you can selectthe DIC to display information.

3-48

DIC Warnings and MessagesWarning messages are displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) to notify the driver that thestatus of the vehicle has changed and that some actionmay be needed by the driver to correct the condition.If there is more than one message that needs tobe displayed they will appear one after another. Somemessages may not require immediate action, butyou should press any of the four DIC buttons on thesteering wheel, if equipped, to acknowledge thatyou received the messages and clear them from thedisplay. If your vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttonson the steering wheel, press the trip odometer resetstem located on the instrument panel cluster toacknowledge messages and clear them from the display.Some messages cannot be cleared from the displaybecause they are more urgent. These messages requireaction before they can be removed from the DICdisplay. You should take any messages that appear onthe display seriously and remember that clearing themessages will only make the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayed and some informationabout them.

BATTERY NOT CHARGINGOn some vehicles, if the battery is not charging duringoperation, this message will appear on the DIC.Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Havethe electrical system checked by your GM dealer assoon as possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,if equipped, will clear the message from the DICdisplay. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem willclear the message from the DIC display. See ChargingSystem Light on page 3-33 and Voltmeter Gage onpage 3-34.

BUCKLE PASSENGERIf your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensingsystem, this message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-58.

This message will display and a chime will sound whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, thepassenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passengerairbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion. You shouldhave the passenger buckle their seat belt.

3-49

This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, thevehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and thepassenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag isenabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is alreadybuckled, this message and chime will not come on.

Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, willacknowledge the message and clear it from the DICdisplay. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem willacknowledge the message and clear it from theDIC display.

BUCKLE SEATBELTIf your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensingsystem, this message reminds you to buckle thedriver’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-58.

This message will display and a chime will sound whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion. You should buckleyour seat belt.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is onand the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will berepeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled, thismessage and chime will not come on.

This message is an additional reminder to the SafetyBelt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-30.

Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, willacknowledge the message and clear it from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill acknowledge the message and clear it from theDIC display.

CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message is displayed when the engine oil needs tobe changed and service is required for your vehicle.See your GM dealer. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-17 for moreinformation. Also see Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-20 for information on how to reset the message.This message will clear itself after 10 seconds untilthe next ignition cycle.

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREOn some vehicles, if there is a problem with thegenerator and battery charging system, this message willappear on the DIC, a chime will sound and the chargingsystem light on the instrument panel cluster will come on.See Charging System Light on page 3-33 and VoltmeterGage on page 3-34 for more information. Driving with thisproblem could drain your battery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by yourGM dealer immediately.

3-50

CHECK OIL LEVELIf the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message willappear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool orwarm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this messagewill clear. This message will clear itself after 10 secondsuntil the next ignition cycle. See Engine Oil onpage 5-17 for additional information.

CHECK WASHER FLUIDIf the washer fluid level is low, this message will appearon the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-40. Pressingany of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear themessage from the DIC display. If your vehicle is notequipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the tripodometer reset stem will clear the message from the DICdisplay. If you do not clear this message, it will clear itselfafter 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.

DRIVER DOOR AJARIf the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle isin a drive gear, this message will appear on thedisplay and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstacles and close thedoor again. Check to see if the message still appearson the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

ENGINE COOLANT HOTIf the cooling system temperature gets hot, this messagewill appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let theengine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach asafe temperature. This message will clear when thecoolant temperature drops to a safe operatingtemperature. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, ifequipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

3-51

ENGINE OVERHEATEDIf the engine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation, this message will appear inthe DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn offthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message will clear when the enginehas cooled to a safe operating temperature.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine isoverheating, severe engine damage may occur. Ifan overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30 for more information.

FUEL LEVEL LOWIf the fuel level is low, this message will appear on theDIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon aspossible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, ifequipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display. It will also clearitself after 10 seconds. The low fuel light near the fuelgage will still remain on in either case. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 3-44, Fuel Gage onpage 3-44 and Fuel on page 5-5.

KEYFOB X BATTERY LOWIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, thismessage will appear on the DIC. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 2-5. Pressing any of thefour DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the messagefrom the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped withthe four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer resetstem will clear the message from the DIC display.

LEFT REAR DOOR AJARIf the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appearon the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstacles andclose the door again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons, if equipped, will clear the message from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

3-52

LOW COOLANT LEVELIf your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the enginecoolant level is low, this message will appear on theDIC. Adding coolant will clear the message. See CoolingSystem on page 5-32. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons, if equipped, will clear the message from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. See“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”in the Index for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

OIL LIFE RESETThis message will appear on the display for about10 seconds after resetting the change engine oilmessage. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-46 and Engine Oil onpage 5-17 for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOWIf low oil pressure levels occur, this message will bedisplayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operateit until the cause of the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engineoil pressure is low, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle untilthe cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.See Engine Oil on page 5-17 for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear onthe display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstacles and closethe door again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons, if equipped, will clear the message from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

3-53

REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message is displayed and a chime will sound whenthe cooling system temperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the engine coolant protection mode.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-30 for furtherinformation.

You may also see this message when the vehicledetermines a problem with the electronic throttle control.See your GM dealer for service.

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear, this message willappear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stopand turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles andclose the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons, if equipped, will clear the message from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

SERVICE 4WDIf a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive system,this message will appear on the DIC. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needs service. See yourGM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, ifequipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

SERVICE AIR BAGIf there is a problem with the airbag system, thismessage will be displayed on the DIC. Have yourGM dealer inspect the system for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-31 and Airbag System onpage 1-49 for more information. Pressing any of thefour DIC buttons, if equipped, will clear the messagefrom the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped withthe four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer resetstem will clear the message from the DIC display.

3-54

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMIf a problem occurs with the brake system, this messagewill appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brake system needs service.See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons, if equipped, will clear the message from theDIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with thefour DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEMOn some vehicles, if there is a problem with the batterycharging system, this message will appear on theDIC. Under certain conditions, the charging system lightmay also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. SeeCharging System Light on page 3-33. The batterywill not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehiclewill lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode. Thevehicle is safe to drive, however you should have theelectrical system checked by your GM dealer. Pressingany of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will clearthe message from the DIC display. If your vehicle is notequipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the tripodometer reset stem will clear the message fromthe DIC display.

SERVICE RIDE CONTROLIf a problem occurs with the suspension system, thismessage will appear on the DIC. If this messageappears, stop and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the suspension system needsservice. See your GM dealer.

SERVICE STABILITYIf you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, itmeans there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®

system. If you see this message, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again.If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comeson, it means there is a problem. You should see yourGM dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, soreduce your speed and drive accordingly.For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

STABILITY SYS ACTIVEYou may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message onthe DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlledsystem has come on to help your vehicle continue togo in the direction in which you are steering.For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

3-55

STABILITY SYS DISABLEDThe STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn onwhen you press the StabiliTrak® button or when thestability control has been automatically disabled.There are four conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.

• One condition is overheating, which could occur ifStabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extendedperiod of time.

• The message will also be displayed if the brakesystem warning light is on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-35.

• The message could be displayed if the stabilitysystem takes longer than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to driving conditions.

• Also, if an engine or vehicle related problem hasbeen detected, and the vehicle needs service,the message will appear. See your GM dealer.

The message will turn off as soon as the conditions thatcaused the message to be displayed are no longerpresent.

For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

TIGHTEN FUEL CAPIf the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly thismessage may appear along with the check engine lighton the instrument panel. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-39. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sureto fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank onpage 5-9. The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A looseor missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light and message off.

TRACTION ACTIVEWhen the traction control system has detected that anyof the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the tractioncontrol system will activate and this message will appearon the DIC. For more information see Traction AssistSystem (TAS) on page 4-8 and StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-10.

TRACTION SYS LIMITEDIf the brake traction control system activates constantlyor if the brakes have heated up due to high-speedbraking, brake traction control will be disabled and theTRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.

For more information on the StabiliTrak® system andtraction control, see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.

3-56

TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINEIf the transmission fluid gets hot, this message willappear on the DIC along with a continuous chime.Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high cancause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle andlet it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This messagewill clear and the chime will stop when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayed onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

TRANSMISSION HOTIf the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, thismessage will appear on the DIC display.

When the transmission enters the protection mode, youmay notice a change in the transmission shiftingpatterns. When the transmission fluid temperaturereturns to normal, the display will turn off and thetransmission shifting patterns will return to normal.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayed onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

The following situations can cause the transmission tooperate at higher temperatures:

• Towing a trailer

• Hot outside air temperatures

• Hauling a large or heavy load

• Over-loading

• Low transmission fluid level

• High transmission fluid level

• Restricted air flow to the radiator

A temporary solution to hotter transmission operatingtemperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.If the transmission is operated at higher temperatureson a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenanceintervals.

3-57

TURN SIGNAL ONIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), thismessage will appear on the display and you will hear achime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to theoff position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,if equipped, will clear the message from the DIC display.If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DICbuttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilities thatallow you to program some features to one settingbased on your preference. All of the customizableoptions listed may not be available on your vehicle. Onlythe options available will be displayed on your DriverInformation Center (DIC).The default settings for the customization features wereset when your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state since then.To change feature preferences, make sure the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press thecustomization button to scroll through the availablecustomizable options.After pressing the customization button, VEHICLESETTINGS will momentarily display before going to acustomization option.

Lock DoorsPress the customization button until LOCK DOORSappears in the display. To select your preferencefor automatic locking, press the select button whileLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lockwhen the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) forthree seconds.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on automatic door locks, see ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 2-10.

Unlock DoorsPress the customization button until UNLOCK DOORSappears in the display. To select your preference forautomatic unlocking, press the select button whileUNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doorswill unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

3-58

UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will beunlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not beunlocked automatically.


Door Lock DelayIf your DIC does not have this feature, you can stillprogram the delayed locking feature. See DelayedLocking on page 2-9 for more information.

When locking the doors with the power lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter and a door orthe tailgate is open, the delayed locking featurewill delay locking the doors and tailgate untilfive seconds after the last door is closed.

Press the customization button until DOOR LOCKDELAY appears in the display. To select yourpreference for delayed locking, press the select buttonwhile DOOR LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors willlock immediately when pressing the power lock switch orthe lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lockuntil five seconds after the last door or the tailgate isclosed. You will hear three chimes to signal thatthe delayed locking feature is in use. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressing thelock button on the door or the remote keyless entrytransmitter a second time.


This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.

3-59

Lock FeedbackPress the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACKappears in the display. To select your preference forthe feedback you receive when locking the vehicle withthe remote keyless entry transmitter, press the selectbutton while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the button with thelock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitterand the horn will chirp the second time you press thelock button.

LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps willflash each time you press the button with the locksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp thesecond time you press the button with the lock symbolon the remote keyless entry transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen locking the vehicle.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

Unlock FeedbackPress the customization button until UNLOCKFEEDBACK appears in the display. To select yourpreference for the feedback you will receive whenunlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter, press the select button while UNLOCKFEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the button withthe unlock symbol on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp thesecond time you press the button with the unlocksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps willflash each time you press the button with the unlocksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and thehorn will chirp the second time you press the unlockbutton.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen unlocking the vehicle.


3-60

Headlamp DelayPress the customization button until HEADLAMPDELAY appears in the display. To select yourpreference for how long the headlamps will stay onwhen you turn off the vehicle, press the select buttonwhile HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN



• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF

The amount of time you choose will be the amount oftime that the headlamps stay on after you turn offthe vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turnoff as soon as you turn off the vehicle.


Perimeter LightsPress the customization button until PERIMETERLIGHTS appears in the display. To select yourpreference for perimeter lighting, press the select buttonwhile PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlampsand back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, ifit is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights willnot come on when you unlock the vehicle with theremote keyless entry transmitter.


Easy Exit SeatPress the customization button until EASY EXIT SEATappears in the display. To select your preference forseat position exit, press the select button whileEASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exitrecall will occur.

3-61

EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will moveto the exit position when the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on seat position exit, see Memory Seat onpage 2-85.

Curb ViewPress the customization button until CURB VIEWappears in the display. To select your preference forcurb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:

CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirrorwill be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirrorwill be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on tilt mirror in reverse, see OutsideAutomatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist onpage 2-53.

Alarm WarningPress the customization button until ALARM WARNINGappears in the display. To select your preference foralarm warning, press the select button while ALARMWARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): Theheadlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when thealarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarmwarning on activation.

3-62

ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp whenthe alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flashwhen the alarm is active.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while your choice is displayed onthe DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on alarm warning type, seeContent Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26.

LanguageTo select your preference for display language, pressthe select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing languages:

• ENGLISH

• FRANCAIS (French)

• ESPANOL (Spanish)

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it.

If you accidentally choose a language that you do notwant or understand, press and hold the customizationbutton and the trip information button at the same

time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languagesin their particular language. English will be in English,Francais will be in French and Espanol will be inSpanish. When you see the language that you wouldlike, release both buttons. The DIC will then display theinformation in the language you chose.

You can also scroll through the different languagesby pressing and holding the trip reset stem forfour seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.

Display UnitsPress the customization button until DISPLAY UNITSappears in the display. To select English or metric, pressthe select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayedon the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH

• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC

If you choose English, all information will be displayedin English units. For example, distance in miles and fueleconomy in miles per gallon.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and end out of the customizable options.

3-63

Audio System(s)Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it canbe added by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can be added,it is very important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the operation of sound equipmentthat has been added improperly.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, findout what your audio system can do, and how to operateall of its controls.

Your vehicle may have a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio systemcan be played even after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-29 formore information.

Setting the TimeThe radio may have a button marked with an H orHR to represent hours and an M or MN to representminutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hourappears on the display. Press and hold the minutebutton until the correct minute appears on the display.The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press and holdthe hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDSTIME appears on the display. To accept this time, pressand hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,for another two seconds. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to anRDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes forthe time to update.

3-64

Radio with CD

If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, yourvehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar

3-65

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ providesdigital quality audio and text information that includessong title and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.

o VOLp (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while inXM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the INFOknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until you hear a beep. The selected display willnow be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AVOLOFF appears on the display.

3-66

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

o TUNEp: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

© SCAN¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appearson the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go toa station, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either theSCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear adouble beep. The radio will go to a preset station, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next presetstation. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return for that pushbutton.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to selectthe equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer appears onthe display, the equalization will be set for thatpreset station.

3-67

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

To adjust the bass and treble to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio willproduce one beep and adjust the display level to themiddle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED willappear on the display, you will hear a beep, andthe display level will be adjusted to the middle position.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing bassor treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass andtreble settings.

The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for eachpreset and source.

If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADEappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and holdit until the radio produces one beep. The balance andfade will be adjusted to the middle position and thedisplay will show the speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED willappear on the display, you will hear a beep, andthe display level will be adjusted to the middle position.

3-68

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear onthe display.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release theTYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andrelease either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows toselect and to take you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or theSEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, goback to Step 1.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exitprogram type select mode.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows fortwo seconds, and the radio will begin scanning thestations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stopat a station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

3-69

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY thatwas set will return.


RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, the information symbolwill disappear from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. You can viewthe last message until a new message is receivedor a different station is tuned to.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicle andmust be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-70

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-71

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourGM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-72

Playing a CDInsert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the INFO knob.If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to goto the beginning of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. TRACK and the tracknumber will appear on the display. If this pushbutton isheld or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toquickly reverse within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse atsix times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

3-73

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toquickly advance within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance atsix times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turnoff random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.

© SEEK¨: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current or to the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

© SCAN¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Theradio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, thengo on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime will appear on the display. To change the defaulton the display, track or elapsed time, press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and the selected display will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remainsafely inside the radio for future listening.

Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.

3-74

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it toyour GM dealer when reporting the problem.

Radio with Six-Disc CD

If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, yourvehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.

Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar

3-75

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is basedin the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ providesdigital quality audio and text information that includessong title and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

o VOLUMEp: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

3-76

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while inXM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the INFOknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until you hear a beep. The selected display willnow be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear onthe display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AUTOVOL OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

o TUNEp: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

© SCAN¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either theSCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.PSC will appear on the display and you will hear adouble beep. The radio will go to a preset station, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next presetstation. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

3-77

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, orXM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return for that pushbutton.


To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to selectthe equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer appears on thedisplay, the equalization will be set for thatpreset station.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. Thedisplay will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), andtreble to the middle position, push and hold the AUDIOknob. The radio will produce one beep and adjustthe display level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTEREDwill appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

3-78

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTEREDwill appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTYwill appear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either theTYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take youto the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or theSEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, goback to Step 1.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exitprogram type select mode.

3-79

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows fortwo seconds, and the radio will begin scanning thestations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stopat a station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed onthe six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY thatwas set will return.


3-80

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. You can view the last message until anew message is received or a different station istuned to.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicle andmust be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-81

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display


XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-82

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourGM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period oftime, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourGM dealer.

3-83

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, will begin to flash andMULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # will appear on the display, loada CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will beginflashing again. Once the light stops flashing andturns green, you can load another CD. TheCD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to loadmore than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number foreach CD will appear on the display.

3-84

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUXbutton, then press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear underthe CD number that is playing and the track number willappear on the display.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

CDZ (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, will begin to flash andEJECT ALL will appear on the display.

2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,REMOVE CD # will appear on the display. TheCD will eject and can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator light willbegin flashing again and another CD will eject.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or theeject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD willbe automatically pulled back into the player. If CD ispushed back into the player, before the 25-second timeperiod is complete, the player will sense an error and willtry to eject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject aCD after you have tried to push it in manually. Theplayer’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press ofeject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the25-second time period has elapsed.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

FWD| (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

3-85

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CDcan be repeated.To use repeat, do the following:• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and

release the RPT button. RPT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT willappear on the display. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on oneCD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one ofthe following:• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in

random order, press and release the RDM button.RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and hold RDM for morethan two seconds. You will hear a beep andRANDOM ALL will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQto select the equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”listed previously in this section.

©SEEK¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than ten seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

©SCAN¨: To scan one CD, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until TRACKSCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Theradio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds,then go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds until ALL CDSCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first trackof each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,to stop scanning.INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track or elapsed time, press theknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until you hear a beep. The selected display willnow be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

3-86

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least oneCD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this sectionfor more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. IfS-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST buttonto turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE rightarrow to locate the track to be saved. The track willbegin to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save thetrack into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep will be heard immediately. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressing the SONGLIST button, two beeps will sound to confirmthe track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to savemore than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. Onebeep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on thedisplay. The recorded tracks will begin to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPEarrows. Seeking past the last saved track will returnto the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select thedesired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, onebeep will be heard immediately. After two secondsof continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track hasbeen deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracksare moved up the list. When another track is added tothe song list, the track will be added to the end ofthe list.

3-87

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for morethan four seconds. One beep will be heard,followed by two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LISTEMPTY will appear on the display indicating thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed fromthe display.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the displayand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it toyour GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-88

Listening to a DVDIf your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol willappear on the radio display indicating that the DVDis available and can be listened to through yourvehicle’s speakers.

To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button untilRSE appears on the radio display. The currentradio source will stop and the DVD sound will comethrough the speakers.

To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to selecta different source.

When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbolwill go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appearon the radio display. The radio will return to the lastradio source that you were listening to.

See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-89 formore information.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVDplayer, a video display screen, two sets of wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.

Parental ControlThis button is located behind the video screen. Pressthis button while a DVD or CD is playing to freezethe video and mute the audio. The video screen willdisplay Parental Control ON and the power indicatorlight on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable allother button operations from the remote control andthe DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.Press this button again to restore operation of theDVD player.

This button may also be used to turn the DVD playerpower on and automatically resume play if the ignition isin RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.

Before You DriveThe RSE system is for rear seat passengers only. Thedriver cannot safely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

3-89

HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.

Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. Anindicator light will illuminate on the headphoneswhen they are on. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following for more information.

Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjustthe volume, adjust this knob.

The transmitters are located below the video displayscreen. The headphones will shut off automaticallyif they lose the signal from the system after aboutfour minutes to save battery power. The signal may belost if the system is turned off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters.

When using the wired headphones, if the front seatpassengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playingthrough the RSE.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the headphonesand repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment doorlocated on the left side of the headphone earpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a long periodof time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals tobe connected from an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.Standard RCA cables, not included, are neededto connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Theyellow connector inputs video and the red and whiteconnectors input right and left audio. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of theauxiliary device.

3-90

To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connectan external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCAjacks and turn both the auxiliary device and theRSE system power on. If the RSE system had beenpreviously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCEbutton on the faceplate or the remote control willswitch the RSE system between the auxiliary deviceand the DVD player.

How to Change the Video Format when inthe Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.In some countries, the video format may be in the PALsystem. To change the video format, performthe following:

1. Press the display menu button.

2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the VideoFormat option.

3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.

4. Press the right or left arrow button to selectthe desired video format.

5. Press the enter button to accept the change.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may beheard through the following possible sources:• Wireless Headphones• Vehicle Speakers• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat

Audio system (if equipped)The RSE system will always transmit the audio signalby infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” previously for moreinformation.The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to thevehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSEsystem may be selected as an audio source on theradio if the RSE system power is on. Once theRSE system is selected as an audio source on theradio, adjust the speaker volume on the radio, ifnecessary. If the RSE system power is not on, the RSEsystem will not be an available source on the radio.Refer to the radio information for the radio thatyour vehicle has for more information.The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to thewired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system (ifequipped). The RSE system may be selected as anaudio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSEsystem power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio (RSA)on page 3-100 for more information.

3-91

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overhead console. Touse the video screen, push forward on the releaselatch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’sposition as desired. When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its latched position.

The DVD player and display will continue to operatewhen the screen is in the up or the down position. Thevideo screen contains the transmitters for the wirelessheadphones and the remote control. If the screen is in theclosed position, the signals will not be available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Directly touching the video screen maydamage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section for moreinformation.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overhead console. TheDVD player can be controlled by the buttons on theDVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote control.See “Remote Control” later in this section for moreinformation.

The DVD player power may be turned on when theignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatible withDVDs of the appropriate region code for the country thatthe vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code isprinted on the jacket of most DVDs.

Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD andPhoto CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVDplayer. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported ifformatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW mediamay or may not be supported by the DVD player.The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error messagewill appear on the display if this type of media is insertedinto the DVD player.

When using the wired headphones, not included, if thefront seat passengers play a CD in the Radio withSix-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite RadioService (if equipped), you will hear the audio forthese sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currentlyplaying through the RSE.

If an error message appears on the video screen, see“DVD Messages” later in this section.

3-92

DVD Player ButtonsO(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE systemon and off. The power indicator light will illuminatewhen the power is on.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenthe DVD player and an auxiliary source.

c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD isplaying to pause it. Press this button again to continuethe play of the DVD or CD.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons tomove the cursor around the DVD menu. After makinga selection press the enter button. This button onlyoperates when playing a DVD.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, anddynamic range compression. The dynamic rangecompression feature can be used to reduce loud audioand increase low audio produced by some DVDs.

To change a feature back to the factory default setting,press this button to display the feature, then pressand hold this button. The default setting will appear onthe display.

While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and holdthis button to display and to remove the track andtime information.

n,q,p,o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use thearrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicesthat are highlighted in any menu.

3-93

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label sideup into the loading slot. The DVD player will continueloading the disc and the player will automatically start,if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAPis active.

If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pausebutton on the DVD player faceplate or on the remotecontrol.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping ofthe copyright information or the previews. SomeDVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, referto the on-screen instructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release thestop button on the DVD player faceplate or theremote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause button onthe DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it was laststopped, if the disc has not been ejected and thestop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc hasbeen ejected or if the stop button has been pressedtwice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD player faceplateto eject the disc. There is not an eject button onthe remote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,the DVD player will reload the disc after a shortperiod of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.The DVD player will not resume play of the discautomatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow below the video screen and press the desiredbutton. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect theability of the RSE system to receive signals from theremote control. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.

Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect thefunction of the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area orin direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Keepthe remote control stored in a cool, dry place.

To extend the life of the batteries, the remote controldoes not have a press and hold feature.

3-94

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD playeron and off.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to themain menu of the DVD.

n,q,p,o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use thearrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, anddynamic range compression. The dynamic rangecompression feature can be used to reduce loud audioand increase low audio produced by some DVDs.

e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu thatwill only appear when a DVD is being played. The formatand content of this function will vary for each disc.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reversethe DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this buttonagain. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenthe DVD player and an auxiliary source.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button toreturn to the start of the current track or chapter. Pressthis button again to return to the previous track orchapter. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

3-95

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypadprovides you with the capability of direct chapter,title, and track number selection.

}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.Press this button before inputting the number.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds afterinputting a number to clear the number(s).

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remotecontrol backlight on. The backlight will time out afterabout 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed whilethe backlight is on.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons tomove the cursor around the DVD menu. After makinga selection press the enter button. This button onlyoperates when playing a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicesthat are highlighted in any menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu. Thisbutton will operate only when a DVD is playing and amenu is active.

| (Camera Angle): Press this button to changecamera angles on DVDs that have this feature when aDVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles andto move through subtitle options when a DVD isplaying. The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forwardthe DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright information or the previews.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD isplaying to pause it. Press this button again to continuethe play of the DVD or CD.

When the DVD is playing, press the pause button thenpress the fast forward button. The DVD will continueplaying in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,press the play/pause button.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advanceto the beginning of the next track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

3-96

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Remove the battery compartment door located onthe bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a long period oftime, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

in on or accessory.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.The system might be inauxiliary mode.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.

Problem Recommended ActionThe picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Check the displaymode settings in thedisplay menu.

The disc was ejected, butit was pulled back intothe DVD player.

The disc is being storedin the DVD player. Pressthe eject button again toeject the disc.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.Change the VideoFormat to PAL or NTSC.See “Stereo RCA Jacks”previously for how tochange the video format.

The language in theaudio or on the screenis wrong.

Check the audio orlanguage selection in themain DVD menu.

3-97

Problem Recommended ActionThe remote control doesnot work.

Check to make surethere is no obstructionbetween the remotecontrol and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

After stopping the player,I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left off andsometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressedtwo times the DVD playerwill begin to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

My disc is stuck in theplayer. The Load/Ejectbutton does not work.

Turn the DVD power off,then on, then press theload/eject button on theDVD player.Do not attempt to forciblyremove the disc from theDVD player. This couldpermanently damage thedisc and DVD player.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cutsout or buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are facingthe front of the vehicle.

3-98

Problem Recommended ActionI lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in DVD mode.

The audio/video skipsor jumps.

The DVD or CD could bedirty, scratched, ordamaged.

The audio from the radiofor the Radio withSix-Disc CD and XM™has taken over the audiofrom the DVD or CD whenusing the wiredheadphones.

The RSE is workingcorrectly.Use the wirelessheadphones or have thefront seat passengerslisten to another audiosource.

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on the videoscreen:

Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if adisc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if thedisc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if theDVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will be displayed ifthe region code of the DVD is not compatible withthe region code of the DVD player.

No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of thebuttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control arepressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with audio distortion in thewireless headphones when operating cellular phones,scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

* Excludes the OnStar® System.

3-99

Cleaning the Video ScreenPour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean clothand gently wipe the video screen. Do not spraydirectly onto the screen and do not press too hard ortoo long on the video screen.

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system thatincludes Radio Data System (RDS) with ProgramType (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind ofmusic you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite RadioService capabilities (if equipped). The radio canalso communicate with the navigation system tobroadcast announcements on traffic, weather, andemergency alert communications. For informationon how to use this system, see the “NavigationSystem” manual.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to anyof the sources: radio, CDs, or DVDs. However, therear seat passengers can only control the sources thatthe front seat passengers are not listening to. Forexample, rear seat passengers may listen to and controlCDs or DVDs through the headphones while thedriver listens to the radio through the front speakers.The rear seat passengers have control of the volume foreach set of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always have priority overthe RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch thesource for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA willnot be able to control the source. You can operate therear seat audio when the main radio is off.

3-100

P (Power): Press this button to turn the system on oroff. The rear speakers will be muted when the poweris turned on unless your vehicle is equipped withthe Bose® audio system.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left knob controls the leftheadphones and the right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:radio, CDs, or DVDs.

x SEEKw: When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM,press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or tothe previous station and stay there. This function isinactive if the front seat passengers are listening tothe radio.

When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go tothe next track on the CD. Press the down arrow togo to the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station set on the pushbuttons on themain radio. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

3-101

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button togo to the other side of the tape. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press this button to go to thebeginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourvehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically bylearning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, itwill not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinkingred light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steeringwheel. They include the following:

g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle hasOnStar®, press this button to interact with the OnStar®

system. See the OnStar® manual provided with yourvehicle for more information.

If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this buttonto silence the system. Press it again, or any otherradio button, to turn on the sound.

PROG (Program): Press this button to play a stationyou have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.The radio will only seek preset stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

3-102

When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press thisbutton to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs areloaded.

Q SOURCER: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or aCD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on thedisplay.

Q SEEKR: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station and staythere. The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrowto fast forward or reverse.

Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease the volume.

Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Staticcan occur on AM stations caused by things likestorms and power lines. Try reducing the treble toreduce this noise.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals willreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio maydisplay NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

3-103

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solutionand clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, dueto the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If themast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten byhand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.

The performance of the XM™ system may be affected ifthe sunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interferewith the performance of the XM™ system. Make surethat the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change thevolume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with theignition on and the radio power off. The chime volumelevel will change from the normal level to loud, andLOUD will appear on the radio display. To change backto the default or normal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change fromthe loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appearon the radio display. Each time the chime volume ischanged, three chimes will sound as an example of thenew volume selected. Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio or chime module willdisable vehicle chimes.

3-104

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-5Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8Traction Assist System (TAS) ...........................4-8Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-10StabiliTrak® System ......................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-13Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-15Passing .......................................................4-15Loss of Control .............................................4-17Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive

Vehicle ....................................................4-18Driving at Night ............................................4-30Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-32City Driving ..................................................4-34

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-35Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-36Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-37Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-38Winter Driving ..............................................4-40If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow ..............................................4-44Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-44Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-45Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-46Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-52

Towing ..........................................................4-56Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-56Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-56Level Control ...............................................4-61Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-61Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-61Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-62

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-9.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know when thevehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes

proper defensive driving more difficult and can evencause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drivea vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some othercountries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is0.05 percent in both France and Germany. TheBAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United Statesis 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able toreact quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-4

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systems have todo their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. See Traction Assist System(TAS) on page 4-8.

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-5

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-36.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,both the brake and ABS warning lights will come onaccompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights andchime will come on each time the ignition is turned onuntil the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.

4-6

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

4-7

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feelthe brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

Traction Assist System (TAS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates only if itsenses that one or both of the rear wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system reduces engine power to limitwheel spin.

The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on in theDIC when the TAS is limiting wheel spin. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-49.

You may hear or feel the system working or notice alack of accelerator response, but this is normal.

The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. When this happens, youmay notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normaland doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.Examples of these conditions include a hardacceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift ofthe transmission or driving on rough roads.

4-8

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 3-10.

When the traction offlight is on, the TAS isoff and will not limitwheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

The traction off light will come on under the followingconditions:• The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by

pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off theautomatic engagement feature of the TAS.

• The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will notoperate in this gear. This is normal.

• The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slowsdown or stops, the light will go off and TAS willbe on again. This is normal.

• A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake Systemor engine-related problem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service.

See Traction Off Light on page 3-36.

The Traction Assist System, as delivered from thefactory, will automatically come on whenever you startyour vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, you should always leave thesystem on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever needto. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle evergets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicleis required. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor Snow on page 4-44.

To turn the system on oroff press the TAS on/offbutton located on theinstrument panel.

If you used the button to turn the system off, the tractionoff light will come on and stay on. You can turn thesystem back on at any time by pressing the buttonagain. The traction off light should go off.

4-9

If desired, you can change the TAS automaticengagement feature so that the system will not come onautomatically when the engine is started. To do so:

1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and thetransmission in PARK (P).

2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.

3. Apply the brake pedal, shift into NEUTRAL (N),press the accelerator pedal to the floor and thenpress the TAS on/off button and hold it down for atleast six seconds.

4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.

5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.

The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will notautomatically come on. You can restore the automaticfeature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS isset to come on automatically or not, you can always turnthe system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off button.

Locking Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, it can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but when one of the rearwheels has no traction and the other does, this featurewill allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

StabiliTrak ® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak® whichcombines antilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directional controlof the vehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnostic checks toinsure there are no problems. You may hear or feelthe system working. This is normal and does not meanthere is a problem with your vehicle. The systemshould initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately twomiles of driving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITYSYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY messagewill be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavyacceleration or braking or multiple turns during thefirst two miles of driving after starting your vehicle, theSTABILITY SYS DISABLED message may appear.If this is the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restartit to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either message appears onthe Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehiclehasn’t gone through hard acceleration, braking ormultiple turns in the first two miles of driving, yourvehicle should be taken in for service.

4-10

The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the systemis both on and activated. It means that an advancedcomputer-controlled system has come on to help yourvehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’resteering. StabiliTrak® activates when the computersenses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it mightif you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.When the system activates, you may hear a noise or feela vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When theSTABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on, you shouldcontinue to steer in the direction you want to go. Thesystem is designed to help you in bad weather or otherdifficult driving situations by making the most of whateverroad conditions will permit. For more information on thestability messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-45.

StabiliTrak® and part ofthe traction control systemcan be turned off orback on by pressing theStabiliTrak® buttonon the instrument panel.

When the system is turned off, the traction off light willilluminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLEDmessage will appear on the DIC to warn the driver thatboth the stability system and part of the tractioncontrol system are disabled. Your vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when StabiliTrak® is off, but willnot be able to use the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction Control Operation” next formore information.

When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned offyou may still hear system noises as a result ofthe brake-traction control coming on.

To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, you should normallyleave StabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary to turnthe system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn offthe system when driving in extreme off-road conditionswhere high wheel spin is required. See If You AreStuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-44.

4-11

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®

system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (engine speedmanagement) and by applying brakes to each individualwheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabled automaticallywhen you start your vehicle, and it will activate anddisplay the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction whiledriving. If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction control will work. The enginespeed management will be disabled. In this state, enginepower is not reduced automatically and the driven wheelscan spin more freely. This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate constantly. For more information on thetraction active message, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-45.

Notice: If the traction off light comes on due toheavy braking and/or because the traction controlsystem has been continuously active, do notallow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. Ifyou do, you may be causing damage to thetransfer case. This could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty.

If the brake traction-control system activates constantlyor if the brakes have heated up due to high-speedbraking, brake traction-control will be disabled and theTRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed. Inthe limited mode, the traction control system will onlyuse engine traction-control and is limited in its ability toprovide optimal performance since the system willnot utilize brake traction-control to control slip on thedrive wheels. The system will return to normal operationafter the brakes have cooled. This can take up totwo minutes or longer depending on brake usage.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spinexcessively while the traction off, ABS and brakewarning lights and the SERVICE STABILITYmessage are displayed, you could damage thetransfer case. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Reduce engine power and do notspin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights andthis message are displayed.

The traction control system may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshiftsof the transmission. When this happens you maynotice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noiseor vibration. This is normal.

4-12

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message willappear on the Driver Information Center and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to use cruise again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 3-10.StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restarting thevehicle, you should see your dealer for service.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path when

you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. While you arein a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Adding the suddenacceleration can demand too much of those places. Youcan lose control. See Traction Assist System (TAS) onpage 4-8.What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-13

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-14

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while youare driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-15

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a running start that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex,the vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

4-16

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you have the Traction Assist System, remember: Ithelps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not havethis system, or if the system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including engine braking by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-17

Off-Road Driving with YourFour-Wheel-Drive VehicleThis off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheeldrive. Also, see Braking on page 4-5. If your vehicledoes not have four-wheel drive, you should notdrive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked. There are noroad signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill ordownhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And thatis why it is very important that you read this guide.You will find many driving tips and suggestions.These will help make your off-road driving saferand more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out. Forexample, be sure to have all necessary maintenanceand service work done. Check to make sure allunderbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached.Be sure you read all the information about yourfour-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enoughfuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluidlevels up where they should be? What are the locallaws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving?If you do not know, you should check with lawenforcement people in the area. Will you be onsomeone’s private land? If so, be sure to get thenecessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road DrivingThere are some important things to remember abouthow to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the load floor andforward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving onthe off-road terrain does not toss things around.

4-18

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higher thanthe seatbacks can be thrown forwardduring a sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured. Keep cargobelow the top of the seatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can betossed about when driving over roughterrain. You or your passengers can bestruck by flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’scenter of gravity, making it more likely toroll over. You can be seriously or fatallyinjured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavyloads inside the cargo area, not on theroof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

You will find other important information in this manual.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46, LuggageCarrier on page 2-61 and Tires on page 5-61.

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raises environmentalconcerns. We recognize these concerns and urge everyoff-roader to follow these basic rules for protectingthe environment:

• Always use established trails, roads and areas thathave been specially set aside for public off-roadrecreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground).

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse isremoved from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires (wherepermitted), camp stoves and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

4-19

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially when goingto a remote area. Know the terrain and plan yourroute. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn ofany blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least one othervehicle. If something happens to one of them, the othercan help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to readthe winch instructions. In a remote area, a winchcan be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to knowhow to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that is safeand close to home before you go into the wilderness.Off-road driving does require some new and differentskills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Youreyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrainfor unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listenfor unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,hands, feet and body, you will need to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-roaddriving. One of the best ways to control your vehicleis to control your speed. Here are some things to keepin mind. At higher speeds:

• you approach things faster and you have less timeto scan the terrain for obstacles.

• you have less time to react.

• you have more vehicle bounce when you driveover obstacles.

• you will need more distance for braking, especiallysince you’re on an unpaved surface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncing andquick changes in direction can easily throwyou out of position. This could cause you tolose control and crash. So, whether you’redriving on or off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safety belts.

4-20

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many different kindsof terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrainand its many different features. Here are some thingsto consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you overhard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snowor ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,acceleration and braking of your vehicle in differentways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction and longerbraking distances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles canbe hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startleyou if you are not prepared for them. Often theseobstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or eventhe rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are somethings to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjects later.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep afirm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs orother surface features can jerk the wheel out of yourhands if you are not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, you cannot control thevehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind ofalertness from driving on paved roads and highways.There are no road signs, posted speed limits orsignal lights. You have to use your own good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on anyroad. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At thevery time you need special alertness and drivingskills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount of alcohol. Youcould have a serious — or even fatal — accident if youdrink and drive or ride with a driver who has beendrinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.

4-21

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down or across ahill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what your vehicle can andcannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you will roll over. Youcould be seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descendor cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a verysmall hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant

incline with only a small change in elevation where youcan easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but youmay not see this because the crest of the hill is hiddenby bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you approacha hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will thesurface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so youwill not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block yourpath, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart wayto find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often haveruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks becausethey are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

4-22

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill, youneed to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintainyour speed. Do not use more power than youneed, because you do not want your wheels to startspinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. Ifthe path twists and turns, you might want to findanother route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills can bedangerous. You could lose traction, slidesideways, and possibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. When driving uphills, always try to go straight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top ofthe hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hillto let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day. Theymake you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speedcan cause an accident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff, or even anothervehicle. You could be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

4-23

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things you shoulddo, and there are some things you must not do.First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle andkeep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply theparking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift the transmissionto REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you will need torestart it. With the brake pedal pressed and theparking brake still applied, shift the transmission toPARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your left handon the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels arestraight and maneuver as you back down. It isbest that you back down the hill with your wheelsstraight rather than in the left or right direction.Turning the wheel too far to the left or rightwill increase the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, orare about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting intoNEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This will not work. Your vehiclewill roll backwards very quickly and you could goout of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about tostall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough tocause you to roll over if you turn around. If youcannot make it up the hill, you must back straightdown the hill.

4-24

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it. Whatshould I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission inPARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphillside and stay clear of the path the vehicle wouldtake if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfercase to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.Leave it in some gear.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). This is becausethe NEUTRAL position on the transfer caseoverrides the transmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parking brake and shiftthe transmission to PARK (P). But do not shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave thetransfer case in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or4 Low position.

4-25

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will want toconsider a number of things:• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain

vehicle control?• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?

Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?

Boulders?• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden

creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try tokeep your vehicle headed straight down, and use alow gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakesand they will not have to do all the work. Descendslowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade. Thiscould cause loss of control and a seriousaccident. Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not do whendriving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control and havea serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take youacross the incline of the hill. A hill that is not toosteep to drive down may be too steep to driveacross. You could roll over if you do not drivestraight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”Your brakes will have to do all the work and couldoverheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But ifit happens going downhill, here is what to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restartthe engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

4-26

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go acrossthe incline of a hill. If this happens, you have todecide whether to try to drive across the incline. Hereare some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or down maybe too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of the wheelbase — the distance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces the likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end. But when youdrive across an incline, the much more narrow trackwidth — the distance between the left and rightwheels — may not prevent the vehicle from tiltingand rolling over. Also, driving across an incline putsmore weight on the downhill wheels. This couldcause a downhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,or even wet grass can cause your tires to slipsideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, itcan hit something that will trip it — a rock, arut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of theincline even worse. If you drive across a rock with theuphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefullywhether to try to drive across an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline does not mean you have todrive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steep willmake your vehicle roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of the incline, donot drive across it. Find another route instead.

Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is nottoo steep, but I hit some loose gravel and startto slide downhill. What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,turn downhill. This should help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,a much better way to prevent this is to get out and“walk the course” so you know what the surfaceis like before you drive it.

4-27

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,be sure you, and any passengers, get out on theuphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. Ifyou get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts toroll over, you will be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the paththe vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always get out on theuphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay wellclear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels willnot get good traction. You cannot accelerate asquickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longerbraking distances.It’s best to use a low gear when you are in mud — thedeeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deepmud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you donot get stuck.When you drive on sand, you will sense a change inwheel traction. But it will depend upon how looselypacked the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such ason beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend tosink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed andavoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

4-28

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that youwill have difficulty accelerating. And if you do getmoving, poor steering and difficult braking can causeyou to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can bedangerous. Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken theice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice andyou and your passengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood watersdemand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive throughit. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe, do not try — you probably willnot get through. Also, water that deep can damage youraxle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. Atfaster speeds, water splashes on your ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as longas your tailpipe is under water, you will never beable to start your engine. When you go through water,remember that when your brakes get wet, it maytake you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away the ground fromunder your tires, and you could lose tractionand roll the vehicle over. Do not drive throughrushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-32 formore information on driving through water.

4-29

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected on theunderbody, chassis or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brake liningscleaned and checked. These substances can causeglazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaustsystem for damage. Also, check the fuel lines andcooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due tooff-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor additional information.

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

4-30

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare, as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

4-31

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,and even people walking.It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shapeand keep your windshield washer tank filled withwasher fluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missing areas onthe windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-32

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops dimple the water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extra followingdistance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-61.

4-33

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-35.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-34

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways—also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to thefreeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as youdrive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to checktraffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend withthe flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to theprevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often asnecessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour blind spot.

4-35

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect tomove slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you aregoing slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

4-36

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

4-37

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-RoadDriving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle onpage 4-18 for information about driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,and transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

4-38

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea, or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-39

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-61.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to bevery careful.

4-40

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it may offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Tryto avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have traction assist, it will improve your ability toaccelerate when driving on a slippery road. But youcan turn the traction assist system off if you ever needto. You should turn the system off if your vehicleever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See If YouAre Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-44.Even though your vehicle has a traction system, you willwant to slow down and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. Under certain conditions, you may wantto turn the traction assist system off, such as whendriving through deep snow and loose gravel, to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See TractionAssist System (TAS) on page 4-8.

If you do not have a traction system, accelerate gently.Try not to break the fragile traction. If you acceleratetoo fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

4-41

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-6.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such asaround clumps of trees, behind buildings, or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead ofyou, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake whileyou are actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow.

Here are some things to do to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe:• Turn on your hazard flashers.• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that

you have been stopped by the snow.• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-42

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

4-43

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as rockingcan help you get out when you are stuck, but youmust use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they canexplode, and you or others could be injured.And, the transmission or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For more information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-76.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. If you havea four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. Ifyour vehicle has the Traction Assist System, you shouldturn it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. If yourvehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn the system offby pressing the StabiliTrak® button so that theSTABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the tractionoff light are illuminated on the instrument panelcluster. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinningyour wheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,you may need to be towed out. Or, you can useyour recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you doneed to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-56.

4-44

Recovery HooksYour vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks. Thehooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. Youmay need to use them if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some place where you cancontinue driving.

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lot offorce. Always pull the vehicle straight out.Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks could break off and you or otherscould be injured from the chain or cablesnapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it wouldnot be covered by warranty.

4-45

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it was designedto carry, the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label isattached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’sdoor open, you will find the label attached belowthe door lock post (striker). The tire and loadinginformation label shows the number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

Label Example

4-46

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows thesize of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-61and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-62 forimportant information on towing a trailer, towingsafety rules and trailering tips.

4-47

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-48




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information labelfor specific information about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers and cargo should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. The label showsthe size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

Example 3

4-49

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximumweights for the front and rear axles, called GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson your front and rear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label also contains informationabout your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “What isfront axle reserve capacity weight and how do Icalculate it?” under Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment on page 4-52.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.

{CAUTION:

In the case of a sudden stop or collision,things carried in the bed of your truck couldshift forward and come into the passengerarea, injuring you and others. If you put thingsin the bed of your truck, you should make surethey are properly secured.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

Your warranty does not cover parts or components thatfail because of overloading.

The label will help you decide how much cargo andinstalled equipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspension components to get addeddurability might not change your weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-50

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

There’s also important loading information for off-roaddriving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehiclefor Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with YourFour-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-18.

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may need to puta limit on how many people you can carry insideyour vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before youbuy and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See Adding aSnow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-52 foradditional information.

The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximumweight of the load your vehicle can carry. It does notinclude the weight of the people inside. But youcan figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for each seat.

The total cargo load must not be more than yourvehicle’s CWR.

4-51

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentBefore installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here aresome things you will need to know:

Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snowplow prep package, adding a plow can damage yourvehicle, and the repairs would not be covered bywarranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carrya snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If yourvehicle has the snow plow option called RPO VYU(snow plow prep package), then the payloadyour vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snowplow is installed. Your vehicle can be damaged ifeither the front or rear axle ratings, or the GVW,are exceeded.

Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle asnow plow?

A: Some vehicles are built with a special package,called RPO VYU (snow plow prep package). Ifyour vehicle has this option, you can add a plowto it, provided certain weights, such as theweights on the vehicle’s axles and the GVW,are not exceeded.

Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?

A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on manythings, such as:

• The options your vehicle came with, and the weightof those options,

• The weight and number of passengers you intendto carry,

• The weight of items you have added to yourvehicle, like a tool box or truck cap,

• The total weight of any additional cargo you intendto carry.

Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snowplow. The total weight of all occupants and cargoinside the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg).This means that you may only be able to carryone passenger. But, even this may be too much ifyou have got other equipment already adding to theweight of your vehicle.

4-52

Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snowplow on your vehicle:

• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axlesdoes not exceed the axle rating for each.

• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengersmust be carried, appropriate counter ballast must beinstalled rear of the rear axle. Counter ballastmust be properly secured so it will not moveduring driving.

• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’srecommendations regarding rear ballast. Rearballast may be required to ensure a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio, even though theactual weight at the front axle may be less than thefront axle rating.

• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assistyou in determining the amount of rear ballastrequired, to help make sure your snowplow/vehiclecombination does not exceed the GVW rating,the front and rear axle ratings, and the front andrear weight distribution ratio.

• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.

Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how doI calculate it?

A: Front axle reserve capacity is the differencebetween your front GAWR and the front axle weightof your truck with full fuel and passengers.Basically, it is the amount of weight you can add toyour front axle before reaching your front GAWR.

The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can befound in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tirelabel, as shown.


4-53

In order to calculate the amount of weight any frontaccessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is addingto the front axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessory is in front of thefront axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plowactually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the frontaxle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm)in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft(305 cm), then:W = 700 lb (318 kg)A = 4 ft (122 cm)W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)

(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =980 lbs (445 kg)

So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is morethan 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plowwithout exceeding the front GAWR.

Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment tomy vehicle?

A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of thevehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewerpassengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargotowards the rear. This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the front GAWR, rearGAWR and the GVWR must never be exceeded.

4-54

{CAUTION:

On some vehicles equipped with certain frontmounted equipment, such as a snow plow, itmay be possible to load the front axle to thefront GAWR but not have enough weight onthe rear axle to have proper brakingperformance. If your brakes can not workproperly, you could have a crash. To help yourbrakes work properly when a snow plow isinstalled, always follow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer’s recommendation forrear ballast to ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, even though theactual front weight may be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicle weight is lessthan the GVWR. Maintaining a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio is necessary toprovide proper braking performance.

Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?

A: This is the difference between your GVWR and theweight of your truck with full fuel and passengers. Itis the amount of weight you can add to yourvehicle before reaching your GVWR. Keep in mindthat reserve capacity numbers are intended asa guide when selecting the amount of equipment orcargo your truck can carry. If you are unsure ofyour truck’s front, rear or total weight, go to a weighstation and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canalso help you with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehiclecan be found in the lower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shown previously.

See your dealer for additional advice and informationabout using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

4-55

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-36.

4-56

Dinghy Towing Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed withall four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internal lubricationwhile being towed.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles Only

4-57

Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:


5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-35 for the properprocedure to select the neutral position foryour vehicle.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached to thetowing vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition off and leave the steeringcolumn unlocked.

Dolly TowingFront Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle withthe rear wheels on the ground, the transmissioncould be damaged. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Never tow your vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with therear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internal lubricationwhile being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle, you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheelson the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section for more information.

4-58

Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.

2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).



5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow dolly.

{CAUTION:



7. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached to thetowing vehicle.

8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove the battery cablefrom the negative terminal (post) of the battery toprevent your battery from draining while towing.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake onpage 2-40 for more information.

3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to the towvehicle. Make sure the wheels are straightbefore towing.Make sure the wheels are straight beforeproceeding to the next steps. Use an adequateclamping device to ensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

4-59

5. Release the parking brake only after the vehiclebeing towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove the battery cablefrom the negative terminal (post) of the battery toprevent your battery from draining while towing.

Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesUse the following procedure to tow your vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Put the transmission in PARK (P).



5. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to the towvehicle.Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow dolly.

{CAUTION:



7. Release the parking brake only after the vehiclebeing towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.

8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove the battery cablefrom the negative terminal (post) of the battery toprevent your battery from draining while towing.

4-60

Level Control

Self-AdjustingThe self-adjusting rear suspension may come as part ofthe premium smooth ride suspension package.

This type of level control will provide a leveled ridingposition as well as improved handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions. A hydraulic pumpinside each rear shock absorber raises the rear ofthe vehicle to the proper height, based on inputs fromthe road surface, while the vehicle is being driven. It takeapproximately 2 miles (3.2 km) of driving for theleveling to complete, depending on the roadsurface conditions.

If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately12 hours, the leveling system may bleed down to a lowerheight. This can be especially apparent if a trailer isleft attached to a parked vehicle for long periods of time.The vehicle must be driven to re-level the vehicle.

If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, the vehicleshould be driven approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) with thetrailer prior to adjusting (leveling) the hitch.

Truck-Camper Loading InformationYour vehicle was neither designed nor intended to carrya slide-in type camper.

Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similarequipment to your vehicle can damage it, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not install a slide-in camper or similar equipmenton your vehicle.

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch loads from the CargoWeight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight ofthe load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t includethe weight of the people inside. But you can figure about150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo loadmust not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.

Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that youwon’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are usinga weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without thespring bars in place.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread out theweight of your load the right way, and if you choose thecorrect hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-62.

4-61

Towing a TrailerDo not tow a trailer during break-in. See New VehicleBreak-In on page 2-28 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Ask yourdealer for advice and information about towinga trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, followthe advice in this part, and see your dealer forimportant information about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight of theTrailer” that appears later in this section.

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration, braking, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

4-62

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:• There are many different laws, including speed limit

restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” laterin this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, alower gear selection if the transmission shiftstoo often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later inthis section.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:• the weight of the trailer,• the weight of the trailer tongue• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Tow/Haul ModeTow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle ispulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is mostuseful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, instop-and-go traffic, or when you need improvedlow-speed control, such as when parking. The purposeof the tow/haul mode is to do the following:

• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictabilityof transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiringless throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavytrailer or a large or heavy load.

Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when thevehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percentof the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.

4-63

Press the button at the end of the shift lever toenable/disable the tow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate toindicate that tow/haulmode has been selected.

The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul everytime it is started.

Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load orwith no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy andunpleasant engine and transmission drivingcharacteristics, but will not cause damage.

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded orwith no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloadedmay result in unpleasant engine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haulis recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Use one of the following charts to determine howmuch your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehiclemodel and options.

4-64

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming thedriver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and ithas all the required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers and cargoin the tow vehicle must be subtracted from themaximum trailer weight.

Above the 5,000 lb (2 268 kg) trailer rating, thehandling/trailering suspension is required onC-1500 models and the handling/trailering or off-roadsuspension is required on K-1500 models.

Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitchdevice on your vehicle could damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitchdevice on your vehicle.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight **GCWR

C-1500 (2WD)5300 V8

3.42 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)4.10 8,200 lbs (3 719 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

K-1500 (4WD)5300 V8


**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight **GCWR

K-2500 (4WD)8100 V8


**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

4-65

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at the address listed inyour Warranty and Owner Assistance InformationBooklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight your vehicle can carry, which willalso reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46for more information about your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to amaximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carryinghitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), upto a maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) for the 1500 seriesand up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the2500 series with a weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weightfor your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extensionthat will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight onthe rear axle.

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and thenthe tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. Ifthey aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply bymoving some items around in the trailer.

4-66

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door orsee Tires on page 5-61. Then be sure you don’t goover the GVW and rear axle limits for your vehicle,including the weight of the trailer tongue.

If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure youdon’t go over the rear axle limit before you applythe weight distributing spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

Weight-Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must beadjusted so that the distance (A) remains the same bothbefore and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weighmore than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use aproperly mounted weight-distributing hitch and swaycontrol of the proper size. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loading and good handlingwhen driving. You should always use a sway controlif your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You canask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle

4-67

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you canturn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must beadequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’smaster cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systemswon’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

• Your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak®.

If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap atthe port on the master cylinder that sends the fluidto the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steelbrake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

4-68

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

4-69

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift thetransmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gearselection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g.,under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).

You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if thetransmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”earlier in this section.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn yourengine off immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let theengine run while parked (preferably on level ground)with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for afew minutes before turning the engine off. If you do getthe overheat warning, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear and not inNEUTRAL (N).

6. Release the regular brakes.

4-70

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow.

Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set.

If the transfer case on four-wheel-drivevehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if your shift lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in NEUTRAL.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,and the Index will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sectionsbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

4-71

Trailer Wiring HarnessHeavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package

Your vehicle is equipped with the eight-wire trailertowing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universalheavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracketon the hitch platform.

The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wireis tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use witha trailer.

The eight-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Light Blue: CHMSL

• Red: Battery Feed**

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

**If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge the battery.

4-72

Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness

This harness may be included with your vehicle as partof the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.

This harness is for an electric brake controller andincludes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installedby your dealer or a qualified service center.

Four-Wire Harness Adapter

This adapter may beincluded with your vehicleas part of the heavy-dutytrailer wiring package.

Use this adapter to connect a standard four-wayround pin connector to the seven-wire harness onyour vehicle.

4-73

Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. Then flipcap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lockonto the tab and help hold the adapter in place. Plugthe four-way round pin connector onto the adapter.

Auxiliary BatteryThe auxiliary battery provision, if equipped, can be usedto supply electrical power to additional equipment thatyou may choose to add.

If your vehicle has thisprovision, this relay will belocated on the passenger’sside of the vehicle, nextto the auxiliary battery.

When using this provision, connection should only bemade to the upper stud (A) of the relay. Do notmake connections to the lower stud (B) of the relay.

The auxiliary battery circuit is protected by a megafuselocated behind the auxiliary battery.

Be sure to follow the proper installation instructionsthat are included with any electrical equipment thatyou install.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and donot use equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating for the auxiliary battery provision.

4-74

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) .................................5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-9Filling Your Tank ............................................5-9Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12Hood Release ..............................................5-12Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14Engine Oil ...................................................5-17Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-20Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25Engine Coolant .............................................5-28Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-30Engine Overheating .......................................5-30Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................5-32Cooling System ............................................5-32

Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-37Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-40Brakes ........................................................5-41Battery ........................................................5-44Jump Starting ...............................................5-45

Rear Axle .......................................................5-49Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-50Front Axle ......................................................5-51Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52Headlamps ..................................................5-53Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ..........................................5-55Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps .............................5-56Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................5-58Taillamps .....................................................5-59Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-60

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60Tires ..............................................................5-61

Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-62Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-65Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-67Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-71Buying New Tires .........................................5-72Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-73Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74Tire Chains ..................................................5-76If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-79Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-82Secondary Latch System ...............................5-89Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-92Spare Tire ...................................................5-95

Appearance Care ............................................5-95Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-96Vinyl ...........................................................5-98Leather .......................................................5-98Instrument Panel ..........................................5-98Interior Plastic Components ............................5-98Glass Surfaces .............................................5-98Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-99Weatherstrips ...............................................5-99

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-99Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-99Finish Care ................................................5-100Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-100Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............5-101Tires .........................................................5-102Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-102Finish Damage ...........................................5-102Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-102Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-102Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-103

Vehicle Identification .....................................5-104Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-104Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-104

Electrical System ..........................................5-105Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-105Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-105Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-105Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-106Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-108Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-109

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-114

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

5-4

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may geta heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. Alittle pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill isconsidered normal. This does not indicate a problemexists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you areusing 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers atwww.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

5-5

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. General Motorsrecommends that you buy gasolines that are advertisedto help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If yourvehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GMdealer has additives that will help correct and preventmost deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

5-6

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does notrecommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containingMMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission control system may beaffected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol)The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)shows the code letter or number that identifies yourengine. You will find the VIN at the top left of theinstrument panel. See Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) on page 5-104.

If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Zonly), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);also see Fuel on page 5-5. In all other engines, includingthe 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleadedgasoline.

Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine(VIN Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E-85). GeneralMotors encourages the use of E-85 in vehicles thatare designed to use it. The ethanol in E-85 is a“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewablesources such as corn and other crops.

5-7

Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel(E-85) pump available. The U. S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuels website(http://www.afdc.doe.gov/refueling_mapsite.shtml) thatcan help you find E-85 fuel. Those stations that do haveE-85 should have a label indicating ethanol content.Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than85%. Your vehicle may not operate properly if theethanol content is greater than 85%.At a minimum, E-85 should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798.To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E-85 fuelmust be formulated properly for your climate accordingto ASTM specification D 5798. If you have troublestarting on E-85, it may be because your E-85 fuel isnot properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fueltank may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed toaccommodate a mixture of gasoline and E-85 fuel.For good starting and heater efficiency below32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank shouldcontain no more than 70% ethanol.

E-85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so youwill need to refill your fuel tank more often whenusing E-85 than when you are using gasoline. Regularunleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling atrailer. For payload capacity with ethanol fuel, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Notice: Some additives are not compatible withE-85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damagecaused by additives would not be covered byyour new vehicle warranty. Do not use additiveswith E-85 fuel.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

5-8

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). It will require more effort to turn thefuel cap on the last turn as you loosen it.

5-9

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noiseto stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model,and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank firstto ensure a quick restart.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-99.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. It will require more effort toturn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-39.

5-10

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-39.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-11

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle locatedinside the vehicle tothe lower left ofthe steering wheel.

5-12

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push left onthe secondary hood release, located under the frontemblem for vehicles with gray body–side claddingor above the emblem for vehicles with no body–sidecladding.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are onproperly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.

Vehicles with Body-Side Cladding

Vehicles without Body-Side Cladding

5-13

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 5300 V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 5-32 and Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap on page 5-30.

C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-25.

G. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (If Equipped). SeeCooling System on page 5-32.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See JumpStarting on page 5-45.

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). SeePower Steering Fluid on page 5-38.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting onpage 5-45.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-41.

L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-109.

M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-40.

5-15

When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 8100 V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-16

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 5-32 and Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap on page 5-30.

C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-25.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

G. Engine-Driven Cooling Fan. See Cooling System onpage 5-32.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See JumpStarting on page 5-45.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting onpage 5-45.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-38.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-41.

L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-109.

M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-40.

Engine OilIf the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on theinstrument cluster, it means you need to checkyour engine oil level right away.For more information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49.You should check your engine oil level regularly; this isan added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-17

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at leastone quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. Thissection explains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-114.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

8.1L Engine

All Other Engines

5-18

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

5-19

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time theoil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message willcome on. Change your oil as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oil change is necessaryfor over a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trainedservice people who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-20

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, resetthe system.

To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-46 for vehicles equipped with theDIC, or do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for10 seconds, the system is resetting.

3. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still doesnot reset, see your dealer for service.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-21

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of theengine air cleaner/filter andthe air filter restrictionindicator, if equipped.

When to InspectIf your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restrictionindicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restrictionindicator, you should inspect the air filter restrictionindicator at every oil change and replace the engine aircleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to.

On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change after50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for more information. If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

5-22

How to InspectVehicles with an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorLocate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine aircleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black oris in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter andreset the indicator. See the steps following to replacethe engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filterrestriction indicator.

Vehicles without an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine aircleaner/filter from the vehicle using the steps following.When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed,lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If theengine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filterand Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator

1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the frontcorner of the engine compartment on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing andlift up the cover.

5-23

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from thehousing. Care should be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfacesand the housing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,by pressing the top button on the indicator.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

5-24

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter every100,000 miles (166 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot enginepart or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

5-25

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drivethe vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperaturegage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehiclehas been sitting for eight hours or more with the engineoff, but this is used only as a reference. Let theengine run at idle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colderthan 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the enginelonger. Should the fluid level be low during this coldcheck, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accuratereading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transmission dipstickhandle with this graphic islocated at the rear ofthe engine compartment,on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 formore information on location.

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstickand wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

5-26

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or inthe HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice using theprocedure described previously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. Ifinconsistent readings persist, check the transmissionbreather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged. Ifreadings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer.

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid whileit is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. Ifthe fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluidto bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint(0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeledother than DEXRON ®-III, Approved for theH-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered by your warranty.Always use automatic transmission fluid labeledDEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.

• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check,” earlier inthis section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

5-27

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add onlyDEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you donot need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

5-28

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking CoolantThe coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD mark.

If your vehicle is equipped with the LOW COOLANTLEVEL message and it comes on and stays on, it meansyou are low on engine coolant. See “LOW COOLANTLEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-49.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight.

5-29

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapThe coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-14 for moreinformation on location.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-37.

In addition, you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT,ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINEPOWER message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-49.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 5-32 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

5-30

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-32 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-62.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, trythis for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you candrive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle isequipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is about twiceas fast as normal idle speed for at least three minuteswhile you are parked.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle isequipped with an electric engine cooling fan, idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.

If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

5-31

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and theREDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, anoverheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. This operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-17.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (If Equipped)

5300 V8 Engine

5-32

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Engine-Driven Cooling Fan

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

8100 V8 Engine

5-33

When the engine is cold,the coolant level should beat or above the FULLCOLD mark. If it is not, youmay have a leak at thepressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-32 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle isequipped with an electric engine cooling fan, with theengine on check to see if the cooling fan is running. If itis not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle isequipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, start theengine again and see if the fan speed increases whenidle speed is doubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.Turn off the engine.

5-34

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but besure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolantas follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

5-35

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise (left) about one full turn.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the FULL COLD mark.

5-36

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Engine Fan NoiseIf your vehicle is equipped with a clutched enginecooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spinsfaster to provide more air to cool the engine. Inmost everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinningslower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improvesfuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavyvehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outsidetemperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutchmore fully engages, so you may hear an increase in fannoise. This is normal and should not be mistaken asthe transmission slipping or making extra shifts. Itis merely the cooling system functioning properly. Thefan will slow down when additional cooling is notrequired and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you start theengine. It will go away as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, youmay hear the fans spinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling isrequired. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operatingyour air conditioning system, the fans change to highspeed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. Thisis normal and indicates that the cooling system isfunctioning properly. The fans will change to low speedwhen additional cooling is no longer required.

5-37

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

5300 V8 engine

8100 V8 engine

5-38

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

Locate the cap with thissymbol. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-14 for moreinformation on location.

To check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-39

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidYour vehicle has a low washer fluid message thatcomes on when the washer fluid is low. The message isdisplayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignitioncycle. When the LOW WASHER FLUID messageis displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-14 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-40

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

5-41

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be above MIN. If itis not, have your brakesystem checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-13.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake system parts sobadly that they will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-95.

5-42

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving, except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your disc brakesadjust for wear.

5-43

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. Werecommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forbattery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-45 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-102.

5-44

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

5-45

4. Open the hood and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations on the othervehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump startingterminal and a remote negative (−) jump startingterminal. You should always use these remoteterminals instead of the terminals on the battery.

The remote positive (+)terminal is located near theengine accessory drivebracket. On some vehicles,the terminal may becovered under a red plasticcover. To access theremote positive (+)terminal, open the redplastic cover.

Vortec 8100 Engine

5-46

The remote negative (−)terminal is located on theengine accessory drivebracket and is marked“GND” for all Vortec5300 engines. It islocated on the thermostathousing and marked“GND” for all Vortec8100 engines.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

Vortec 5300 Engine

5-47

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminal ismarked GND.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there, andthe chance of sparks getting back to the batteryis much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

5-48

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover, ifequipped, to its original position.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-49

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole. The proper level for the 2500 Seriesis from 0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottomof the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to reach theproper level.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-13.

Four-Wheel DriveTransfer CaseIt is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften to change the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.1500 Series shown, 2500 Series similar

5-50


1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add new fluid until the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on the transfer case. Toget an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

3. Reinstall the filler plug. Use care not to overtightenthe filler plug.

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.


To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

5-51

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the front axle, you may need to addsome lubricant:

• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricantto raise the level from 1/2 inch (12 mm) to about5/8 inch (18 mm) below the filler plug hole forthe 1500 series, and from 1/4 inch (6 mm) to about3/8 inch (10 mm) below the filler plug hole for2500 series.

• When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-13.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-60.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions on the bulb package.

5-52

Headlamps

Vehicles with Body-Side Cladding1. Remove the turn

signal/parking lamphousing by pressingthe release clip on theoutboard side of thehousing and pulling theoutboard end of thehousing toward you.

2. Pull the inboard side of the housing out fromthe vehicle.

3. Pull the pins away from their clips and pull them upuntil they completely release from the vehicle.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly out of the vehicle.

5-53

A. Low-Beam HeadlampB. High-Beam Headlamp

5. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull itout of the housing.

6. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb. Use

care not to touch the new bulb with your barehands or anything damp or oily.

8. Place the connector with the new bulb into theheadlamp housing and turn it clockwise until it istight.

9. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicleand reinstall the two pins.

10. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parkinglamp housing into the pocket.

11. Push the outboard side of the housing in until therelease clip snaps into place.


1. Remove the pin on the headlamp assembly byturning the pin up and pulling it straight out.

2. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

5-54

A. Low-Beam HeadlampB. High-Beam Headlamp

3. Unplug the electrical connector.4. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it

from the headlamp assembly.5. Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it

clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touchthe bulb with your fingers or hands.

6. Plug in the electrical connector.7. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

Install the pin and turn it into the locking feature.

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andParking Lamps

Vehicles with Body-Side Cladding

A. Sidemarker LampB. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

5-55

1. Remove the turnsignal/parking lamphousing by pressingthe release clip on theoutboard side of thehousing and pulling theoutboard end of thehousing toward you.

2. Pull the inboard side of the housing out fromthe vehicle.

3. Press the locking release lever (the sidemarkerlamp does not have a locking release lever), turnthe bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it fromthe turn signal/parking lamp housing.

4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.

5. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.

6. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing andturn it clockwise until it locks (the sidemarker lampdoes not lock into place).

7. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parkinglamp housing into the pocket.

8. Push the outboard side of the housing in until therelease clip snaps into place.

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andDaytime Running Lamps


A. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)B. Front Turn Signal/Parking LampC. Sidemarker Lamp

1. Remove the headlamp assembly asmentioned previously.

5-56

2. Press the retainer clip (arrow), located behindthe turn signal housing, towards the outside ofthe vehicle.

3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.

5-57

4. Press the locking release lever (the sidemarkerlamp does not have a locking release lever), turnthe bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it fromthe turn signal housing.

5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.

6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care notto touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.

7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing andturn it clockwise until it locks (the sidemarker lampsdoes not lock into place).

8. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicleplacing the hook and posts on the inner side intothe alignment holes first and then the outer side intothe retainer bracket. Push until you hear a click.

9. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Vehicles with Body-Side CladdingThe DRLs are located in the front fascia near thefoglamps. They can be identified by their square shape.

1. Reach under the frontfascia and locate theDRL housing. Besure you are notpicking the foglamphousing, which is nearthe DRLs.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and removeit from the DRL housing.

3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and put a newbulb in.

4. Place the bulb socket back into the DRL housingand turn it clockwise until it is tight.

5-58

TaillampsA. StoplampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp

To replace taillamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-22 formore information.

2. Remove the two rearlamp assembly screwsnear the tailgatelatch and pull out thelamp assembly.

3. Press the releasetab and turn thebulb socketcounterclockwise toremove it fromthe taillamp housing.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.

5-59

5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn thesocket clockwise into the taillamp housing untilit clicks.

6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tightenthe screws.

7. Close the tailgate.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 3157Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 4114KFront Parking and TurnSignal Lamp 3157A or 3457NA

HeadlampsHigh-Beam *9011 or 9005Low-Beam 9006

Rear Marker/Turn Signal Lamp,Taillamp and Stoplamp 3157

Sidemarker Lamp 194*Vehicles with Body-Side Cladding

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear and cracking. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For proper type and length,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-15.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly dothe following:

1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it isfacing away from the windshield.

5-60

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assemblytoward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-46.

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-67.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact —such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If yourtread is badly worn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

5-61

Tire Sidewall LabellingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examples of atypical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information, seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-73.(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

5-62

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC

specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximum pressure needed tosupport that load when used in a dual configuration. Forinformation on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67 and Loading YourVehicle on page 4-46.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximum pressure needed tosupport that load when used as a single. For informationon recommended tire pressure see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-46.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

5-63

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts of atire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT asthe first two characters in the tire size means a lighttruck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of thelight truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letterR means radial ply construction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. Theload index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratingsrange from A to Z.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

5-64

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkiloPascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code includes the TireIdentification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tire manufacturer, productionplant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-46.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-65

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bears white lettering orbears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper than the same moldings onthe other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

5-66

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): Atire information system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-73.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-46.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight andthe original equipment tire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading InformationLabel” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-67

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to thevehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’sdoor lock post (striker). This label lists your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and their recommended cold tireinflation pressures. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and an example of the tireand loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-46.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire. For additional informationregarding the spare tire, see Spare Tire on page 5-95.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tiresare cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary. Ifthe inflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Improved Ride with Light Load(2500 Series Vehicles Only)

{CAUTION:

Do not overload your vehicle or underinflatethe tires. Overloading your vehicle orunderinflating the tires can cause rapid loss ofpressure and cause a serious crash. Only usereduced rear tire pressure when your vehiclemeets the criteria for a light load.

5-68

If you have a 2500 Series vehicle with LT245/75R16Esize tires and you are operating your vehicle underlight-load conditions, you can improve ride quality byadjusting both the front and rear cold tires to therecommended pressure shown on the ImprovedRide label.

An example of the Improved Ride label is shown here.This label is attached to the lower section of thedriver’s door edge, for 2500 Series vehicles only.

Operating your vehicle with a light load means:

• The total weight of occupants in your vehicle is lessthan the total seating capacity number your vehiclewas designed to carry multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).The total seating capacity number is on the Tireand Loading Information label.

• No more than 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo, which mustbe secured in the cargo area.

• No trailer is attached to your vehicle.

• You have not added any additional equipment toyour vehicle, like a truck cap or tool box.

The vehicle load capacity and the rear axle loadcapacity are reduced when the tire pressure is loweredto the amount recommended for improved ride.Before operating your vehicle with passengers or cargogreater than a light-load, you must inflate the reartires to the recommended cold tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information Label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-46.

5-69

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-71 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-74 for more information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-78.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loadinginformation label. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-46 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67,for more information. Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-114.

5-70

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get allthe rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-78.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tires maynot have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:• You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through the

tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged

deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-71

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Certification/Tire label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-46 for more information about these labels andwhere they can be found on your vehicle.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was newhad a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPCSpec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When youget new tires, GM recommends that you get tires withthat same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride, tire pressure monitoring system performanceand other things during normal service on your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread design, theTPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mudand snow).

Whenever you replace your tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating and constructiontype (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low pressure warning.Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low pressure warningthat is higher or lower than the proper warning level youwould get with TPC Spec numbered tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a differentsize spare than the road tires (those originallyinstalled on your vehicle). When new, yourvehicle included a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overall diameter asyour vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is allright to drive on it. Because this spare wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle, it will notaffect vehicle handling.

5-72

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most

passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

5-73

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on asmooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

5-74

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

5-75

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle is a 1500 Series, don’t use tirechains. They can damage your vehicle becausethere’s not enough clearance. Tire chains usedon a vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could cause you tolose control of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’tspin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

Notice: If your vehicle is a 2500 Series, use tirechains only where legal and only when you must.Use chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Don’tuse chains on the tires of the front axle. Tightenthem as tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels withchains on will damage your vehicle.

5-76

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-77

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear— not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.



5. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

6. Put the wheel blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be the tireon the other side, at the opposite end ofthe vehicle.

The following information will tell you how to use thejack and change a tire.

5-78

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe jack and the wheel blocks are located under acover near the passenger side rear seat.

To remove the jack and wheel blocks, do the following:

1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nutsone-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling thejack cover off.

A. Wheel BlocksB. KnobC. Wing NutD. Retaining Hook

E. JackF. Jack HeadG. Mounting Bracket

2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (G)by turning the knob (B) on the jack counterclockwiseto lower the jack head (F) from the mounting bracket.

3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to thejack (E) by turning the wing nut (C)counterclockwise. Place the wheel blocks whereneeded as indicated in the previous caution.

Rear seat (passenger side) jack cover

5-79

The tools for changing a flat tire are located in thepassenger’s side top-box storage unit.

To remove the tools, do the following:

1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side top-boxstorage unit. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it ifit is locked. See Top-Box Storage on page 2-77for more information.

2. Remove the black pouch from the storage box.You now have all of the tools you will need tolower the spare tire and change a flat.

You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheelwrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.

A. Spare Tire(Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist AssemblyC. Hoist CableD. Tire RetainerE. Hoist ShaftF. Hoist End of

Extension Tool

G. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

H. Wheel WrenchI. Jack Handle

ExtensionsJ. Hoist Lock (If

Equipped)

Top-box storage unit (passenger’s side)

5-80

Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:

1. Your vehicle may be equipped with a hoist lock (J).Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper anduse the ignition key to remove the lock.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jackhandle extensions (I) as shown.

3. Insert the hoist end(open end) (F) of theextension throughthe hole (G) in therear bumper.

Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects tothe hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of theextension is used to lower the spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise tolower the spare tire to the ground. Continue toturn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can bepulled out from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, thesecondary latch is engaged causing the tirenot to lower. See Secondary Latch System onpage 5-89.

5-81

5. The wheel wrench hasa hook that allows youto pull the hoistcable towards you toassist in reachingthe spare tire.

6. When the tire hasbeen lowered, tilt theretainer (D) at theend of the cable soit can be pulledup through thewheel opening.

7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions to removethe flat tire and raise the vehicle.

The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), thewheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handleextensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).

5-82

1. If your vehicle haswheel nut caps, loosenthem by turning thewheel wrenchcounterclockwise. If thevehicle has a centercap with wheelnut caps, the wheel nutcaps are designed tostay with the center capafter they areloosened. Remove theentire center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place thechisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot onthe wheel and gently pry out.

2. Use the wheelwrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts.Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise toloosen the wheel nuts.Don’t remove thewheel nuts yet.

5-83

These locations (A) front position (B), rear positionare the general area of jack placement. Seetext and art following for the exact jack placement.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get undera vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

3. Position the jack under the vehicle.

Jack positions (overall view)

5-84

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire ofthe vehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)and only one jack handle extension (D). Attachthe wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jackon the frame behind the flat tire where the framesections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there is enough room for the sparetire to clear the ground.

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of thevehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)and both jack handle extensions (D). Attach thewheel wrench to the jack handle extensions. Attachthe jack handle to the jack. On all 1500 Seriesvehicles, use the jacking pad provided on the rearaxle. On 2500 series vehicles, use the axlebetween the spring and shock bracket. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raisethe vehicle far enough off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.

Front position

Rear position1500 series


5-85

4. Remove all the wheelnuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

5. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-86

6. After mounting thespare, put the wheelnuts back on with therounded end of the nutstoward the wheel.Tighten each wheel nutby hand. Then use thewheel wrench until thewheel is held againstthe hub.

7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

Front position



5-87

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-114 for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-114 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence asshown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the full-size wheel and tire, you mustalso reinstall the wheel cover with attached plasticnuts, the plastic nut caps or the smooth center cap.

• If you are reinstalling a wheel cover with attachedplastic nuts, place it on the wheel and tighten thenuts by hand to get them started. Then tightenthe nut caps with the wheel wrench until they aresnug. Do not overtighten the nut caps or theymay break.

5-88

• If you are reinstalling plastic nut caps, tighten thenuts by hand to get them started. Then tightenthe nut caps with the wheel wrench until they aresnug. Do not overtighten the nut caps or theymay break.

• If you are reinstalling the smooth center cap, placeit on the wheel and tap it into place until it seatsflush with the wheel.

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire from suddenly fallingoff your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointingdown. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools onpage 5-92.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read all theinstructions. Failure to read and follow theinstructions could damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could get hurt. Read andfollow the instructions listed below.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, dothe following:

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable endis visible.If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannotovertighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

5-89

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If thespare tire lowers to the ground, continue withStep 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools onpage 5-79.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, withthe backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottom edgeof the jack (A) on thewheel blocks (B),separating them sothat the jack isbalanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with the wheelblocks) under the vehicle towards the front of therear bumper.

5-90

9. Position the center lift point of the jack under thecenter of the spare tire.

10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the end fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place. Thesecondary latch has released and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.

12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack or is hanging bythe cable.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. If thespare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behind you oron either side of you as you pull the jack outfrom the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare while firmly pulling thejack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert thehoist handle, extension and wheel wrench intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turnthe wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower thespare the rest of the way.

5-91

14. Tilt the retainer (D) atthe end of the cableand pull it throughthe wheel opening. Pullthe tire out fromunder the vehicle.

15. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire usingthe hoist assembly until it has been replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing theFlat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-82.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tireunder your vehicle for an extended period of time orwith the valve stem pointing up may damage thewheel. Always stow the wheel with the valvestem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repairedas soon as possible.

5-92

A. Spare Tire(Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist AssemblyC. Hoist CableD. Tire RetainerE. Hoist ShaftF. Hoist End of

Extension Tool

G. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

H. Wheel WrenchI. Jack Handle

ExtensionsJ. Hoist Lock (If

Equipped)

1. Put the tire on theground at the rear ofthe vehicle withthe valve stem pointeddown and towardthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Tilt the retainer (D) downward and through thewheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside of the wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)together.

5-93

4. Insert the hoist end (F)through the hole (G)in the rear bumperand into thehoist shaft.

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure theretainer is seated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of thevehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwiseuntil you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,

and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves, usethe wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Reinstall thespare tire lock (if equipped).

(A) Push and pull, (B) turn

5-94

To store the tools, follow these steps:

1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back inthe top-box storage unit.

2. Assemble the wheel blocks and bottle jack togetherwith the wing nut by reversing Step 2 underRemoving the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-79.

3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-coverwingnuts.

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46for information regarding proper tire inflation and loadingyour vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, installor store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tireand Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-82 and Storinga Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-92.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you shouldstop as soon as possible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. Have the damaged or flat roadtire repaired or replaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tirewill be available in case you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire thanthe road tires-those originally installed on your vehicle.This spare tire was developed for use on yourvehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the smaller spare is installed,keep the vehicle in two-wheel drive as much as possible.

If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not matchyour vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size andtype, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.

Appearance CareCleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a matchis struck near them or if they get on a hot part of thevehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaledin an enclosed space. When anything from a containeris used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow themanufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always openthe doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaningthe inside.

5-95

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless thismanual says you can. In many uses, these willdamage the vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loosedirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaceswith a clean, damp cloth.

GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to aclean area often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

5-96

Most stains can be removed with club soda water. Toclean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. Forsolids: remove as much as possible and thenvacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabrictoo wet.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is

not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does notaffect the color of the fabric.

2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. Forsolids: remove as much as possible and thenvacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto aclean soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directlyto the fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up withthe club soda water instructions given earlier inthis section.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,and blood can be removed using the club soda waterinstructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingersafter cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with awater and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) ofbaking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.Let dry.

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with anapproved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner onFabric” instructions described earlier.

5-97

VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Thismay have to be done more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain ifthey are not removed quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Instrument PanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-103.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

5-98

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth ofcolor, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. GM-approvedcleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-103.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicleon page 5-99.

5-99

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-103.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, you may use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap, or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution. Thewindshield is clean if beads do not form when it isrinsed with water.

5-100

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsThe vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

5-101

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finishshould be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrodequickly and may develop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas offinish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s bodyand paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-102

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery, andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-13.

5-103

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glove box. Itis very helpful if you ever need to order parts. Onthis label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

5-104

Electrical SystemNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty. Some add-on electrical equipmentcan keep other components from working asthey should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto add anything to your vehicle, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without – like the radio orcigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

5-105

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The fuse block accessdoor is on the driver’s sideedge of the instrumentpanel. Pull off the cover toaccess the fuse block.

To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, holdthe end of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

You may have spare fuses located behind the fuseblock access door. These can be used to replace a badfuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.

Fuses UsageRR Wiper Rear Window Wiper Switch

SEO ACCY Special Equipment OptionAccessory

WS WPR Windshield Wipers

TBC ACCY Truck Body ControllerAccessory

IGN 3 Ignition, Heated Seats4WD Four-Wheel Drive System

5-106

Fuses UsageHTR A/C Climate Control System

LOCK Power Door Lock Relay(Lock Function)

HVAC 1 Inside Rearview Mirror,Climate Control System

L DOOR Driver’s Door HarnessConnection

CRUISE Cruise Control

UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay(Unlock Function)

RR FOG LP Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)BRAKE Anti-Lock Brake System

DRIVER UNLOCKPower Door Lock Relay(Driver’s Door UnlockFunction)

IGN 0 PCM, TCMTBC IGN 0 Truck Body Controller

VEH CHMSL Vehicle and Trailer HighMounted Stoplamp

LT TRLR ST/TRN Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer

Fuses Usage

LT TRN Left Turn Signalsand Sidemarkers

VEH STOPVehicle Stoplamps, BrakeModule, Electronic ThrottleControl Module

Body Harness ConnectorRT TRLR ST/TRN Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer

RT TRN Right Turn Signalsand Sidemarkers

DDM Driver Door Module

AUX PWR 2 Rear Cargo AreaPower Outlets

LOCKS Power Door Lock System

ECC Rear Electronic ClimateControl, Liftgate

TBC 2C Truck Body ControllerFLASH Flasher Module

CB LT DOORS Left Power Window CircuitBreaker

TBC 2B Truck Body ControllerTBC 2A Truck Body Controller

5-107

Center Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe center instrument panel utility block is locatedunderneath the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Device Usage

SEOSpecial EquipmentOption/Off-road LampsHarness Connector

TRAILER Trailer Brake WiringUPFIT Upfitter (Not Used)SL RIDE Ride Control (Not Used)HDLR 2 Headliner Wiring Connector 2BODY Body Wiring ConnectorDEFOG Rear Defogger RelayHDLNR 1 Headliner Wiring Connector 1SPARE RELAY Not Used

CB SEAT Driver and Passenger SeatModule Circuit Breaker

CB RT DOOR Rear Right Power Window,Passenger Door Module

SPARE Not UsedINFO Not Used

5-108

Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,near the battery. Lift the cover for access to thefuse/relay block.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between yourthumb and index finger and pull straight out.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 formore information on its location.

5-109

*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.

*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.

*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.

*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.

*5 — PCM Ignition

Fuses UsageGLOW PLUG Not UsedCUST FEED Accessory PowerHYBRID HybridSTUD #1 Auxiliary Power

MBECMid Bussed Electrical CenterPower Feed, Front Seats,Right Doors

BLOWER Front Climate Control Fan

LBEC

Left Bussed ElectricalCenter, Door Modules, DoorLocks, Auxiliary PowerOutlet—Rear Cargo Area andInstrument Panel

STUD 2 Accessory Power/TrailerWiring Brake Feed

ABS Anti-Lock BrakesVSES/ECAS Vehicle StabilityIGN A Ignition PowerIGN B Ignition Power

Fuses Usage

LBEC 1Left Bussed Electrical Center,Left Doors, Truck BodyController, Flasher Module

TRL PARK Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring

RR PARK Right Rear Parking andSidemarker Lamps

LR PARK Left Rear Parking andSidemarker Lamps

PARK LP Parking Lamps RelaySTRTR Starter RelayINTPARK Interior LampsSTOP LP Stoplamps

TBC BATT Truck Body ControllerBattery Feed

S/ROOF SunroofSEO B2 Off-Road Lamps

4WSVent SolenoidCanister/QuadrasteerModule Power

RR HVAC Rear Climate Control

AUX PWR Auxiliary PowerOutlet — Console

IGN 1 Ignition RelayPCM 1 Powertrain Control Module

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control,Electronic Brake Controller

5-111

Fuses Usage

INJ 1 Ignition Coil, FuelInjectors--Bank 1

INJ 2 Ignition Coil, FuelInjectors--Bank 2

IGN E

Instrument Panel Cluster, AirConditioning Relay, TurnSignal/Hazard Switch,Starter Relay

RTD Ride ControlTRL B/U Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring

PCM B Powertrain Control Module,Fuel Pump

F/PMP Fuel Pump (Relay)O2A Oxygen Sensors

B/U LPBack-up Lamps, AutomaticTransmission Shift LockControl System

RR DEFOG Rear Window DefoggerHDLP-HI Headlamp High Beam RelayPRIME Not UsedO2B Oxygen Sensors

AIRBAG Supplemental InflatableRestraint System

FRT PARK Front Parking Lamps,Sidemarker Lamps

Fuses Usage

DRL Daytime RunningLamps (Relay)

SEO IGN Rear Defog RelayTBC IGN1 Truck Body Controller IgnitionHI HDLP-LT High Beam Headlamp-Left

LH HID Left Hand High IntensityDischarge Lamps

DRL Daytime Running LampsRVC Regulated Voltage Control

IPC/DICInstrument PanelCluster/Driver InformationCenter

HVAC/ECAS Climate Control ControllerCIG LTR Cigarette LighterHI HDLP-RT High Beam Headlamp-RightHDLP-LOW Headlamp Low Beam Relay

A/C COMP Air ConditioningCompressor Relay

A/C COMP Air Conditioning CompressorRR WPR Rear Wiper/WasherRADIO Audio System

SEO B1Mid Bussed ElectricalCenter, HomeLink, RearHeated Seats

LO HDLP-LT Headlamp Low Beam-Left

5-112

Fuses Usage

BTSI Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock System

CRNK Starting SystemLO HDLP-RT Headlamp Low Beam-RightFOG LP Fog Lamp RelayFOG LP Fog LampsHORN Horn Relay

W/S WASH Windshield and Rear WindowWasher Pump Relay

W/S WASH Windshield and Rear WindowWasher Pump

INFO OnStar®/Rear SeatEntertainment

RADIO AMP Radio Amplifier

RH HID Right Hand High IntensityDischarge Lamp

HORN Horn FuseEAP Electric Adjustable PedalsTREC All-Wheel Drive ModuleSBA Supplemental Brake Assist

Auxiliary Electric Cooling FanFuse Block

The auxiliary electriccooling fan fuse block islocated in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehiclenext to the underhoodfuse block.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

Fuses UsageCOOL/FAN Cooling FanCOOL/FAN Cooling Fan Relay FuseCOOL/FAN Cooling Fan Fuse

Relays UsageCOOL/FAN 1 Cooling Fan Relay 1COOL/FAN 3 Cooling Fan Relay 3COOL/FAN 2 Cooling Fan Relay 2

5-113

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricAir Conditioning Refrigerant R-134a 1.6 lbs 0.7 kg

Engine Cooling SystemVORTEC™ 5300 V8 Automatic with Front A/C (EngineFan Driven Cooling System)VORTEC™ 5300 V8 Automatic with Front A/C (ElectricCooling Fan System)VORTEC™ 8100 V8 Automatic (Engine Fan DrivenCooling System)

16.0 quarts

17.0 quarts

27.0 quarts

14.5 L

16.0 L

25.5 L

Engine Oil with Filter5300 V88100 V8

6.0 quarts6.5 quarts

5.7 L6.1 L

Fuel Tank Capacity15002500

31.0 gallons37.5 gallons

117.0 L142.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 140 ft lb 190YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

5-114

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

VORTEC™ 5300 V8 T Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

VORTEC™ 5300 V8 Z Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

VORTEC™ 8100 V8 G Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5-115

✍ NOTES

5-116

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month .................................6-10At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure tofollow scheduled maintenance may not becovered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive very shortdistances only a few times a week. Or you may drive longdistances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You mayuse your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive itto work, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-46.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-DriveVehicle on page 4-18.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-8 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench ® dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

6-3

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it and whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,it means that service is required for your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the system must bereset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trainedservice technicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-20 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,certain services, checks and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance IIand that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-17. Reset oillife system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22. An Emission ControlService. See footnotes † and (l).

•

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-61. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers)25,000

(41 500)50,000

(83 000)75,000

(125 000)100,000

(166 000)125,000

(207 500)150,000

(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Vehicles without a filter restrictionindicator: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-22. An Emission ControlService.

• • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (severe service). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

6-6

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers)25,000

(41 500)50,000

(83 000)75,000

(125 000)100,000

(166 000)125,000

(207 500)150,000

(240 000)

Change transfer case fluid. Seefootnote (g). • • •

Inspect evaporative control system. AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnotes † and (k).

• • •

Replace spark plugs and inspectspark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service (orevery 5 years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. •

6-7

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steeringlinkage, transmission shift linkage and parkingbrake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricatedunless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,or they could be damaged.(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect allpipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM

parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at leastonce a year.(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,midgate hinges, side storage box door hinges, tailgatehinges, tailgate linkage, outer tailgate handle pivot points,latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks and folding seathardware. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better and not stick orsqueak.(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks andproper installation.

6-8

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer performthis service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 forwhat to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines andhoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition.Check that the purge valve works properly (if equipped).Replace as needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assistyou with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-17 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

6-9

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-61 for furtherdetails. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. Ifit moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-78.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-40if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

6-10

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-40 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but donot start the engine. Without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

6-11

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-12

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GMGoodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Todetermine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 5-17.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic Brake

SystemDelco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

6-13


Front AxleSAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 1052271, inCanada 10950849).

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 12378261, inCanada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

AutomaticTransfer Case

AUTO-TRAK II Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, inCanada 10953626).

Front AxlePropshaftSpline or

One-PiecePropshaft

Spline(Two-Wheel

Drive with Auto.Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, inCanada 10953511) or lubricantmeeting requirements ofGM 9985830.


Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer TailgateHandle Pivot

Points

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube (GM PartNo. U.S. 12371287, in Canada10953437).

6-14

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterHigh CapacityStandard

25313348*25313349

A1519C*A1518C

Oil Filter5300 V88100 V8

8898421525324052

PF46PF454

Spark Plugs5300 V88100 V8

1257116412578277

41-98541-983

Wiper Blades22 inches (56.0 cm) 15153642 —

*High-capacity engine air cleaner/filter 25313349 (A1518C) may be substituted.

6-15

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ..................................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ....................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................7-11Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed toChevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-4

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgramThis program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you mayrequire for your vehicle, such as hand controls andwheelchair/scooter lifts.

The offer is available for a limited period of time fromthe date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, orto determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance ProgramAs the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as you drivein the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’sRoadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year tospeak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistancerepresentative.

We will provide the following services during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expenseto you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel($5 maximum) for the customer to get to thenearest service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):Replacement keys or locksmith service willbe covered at no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacementkey will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Assistance providedwhen the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will becovered at no charge. The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if notcovered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require abattery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, our RoadsideAssistance Representatives will explain any paymentobligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

7-6

While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we are only a phone callaway. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, inChevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveroadside assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationChevrolet has always exemplified quality and value inits offering of motor vehicles. To enhance yourownership experience, we and our participating dealersare proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, you shouldcontact your dealer and request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

7-7

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolethelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway or round trip shuttle service to a destination upto 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may beavailable for the use of public transportation such as ataxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses of up to a five-day maximummay be available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warrantyrepair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.This requires that you sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state, local and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also be responsible fortaxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rentalusage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

7-8

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingGM dealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your GM dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during theComplete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitoremission control components to optimize fuel economy,to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help thedriver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;other information is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly called eventdata recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as the AirbagSensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehiclemay record information about the condition of the vehicleand how it was operated, such as data related toengine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision. If yourvehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak, steeringperformance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety.

7-9

Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, theseon-board systems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the device that storesthe data is required. GM will not access informationabout a crash event or share it with others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, pleasecheck the OnStar® subscription service agreementor manual for information on its operations and datacollection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

7-10

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you will notifyGeneral Motors. Please call the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

7-11

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-62Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-30Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-20, 3-22Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-32Readiness Light .......................................... 3-31

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9Airbag System ................................................ 1-49

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle ................................................... 1-62

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-56Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-58Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-62What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-55What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-56When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-54Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-51

Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-104Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ........................................ 3-104Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-36

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-95Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-101Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-99Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-102Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-99Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-96Finish Care ............................................... 5-100Finish Damage .......................................... 5-102Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-98Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-98Leather ...................................................... 5-98Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-102Tires ........................................................ 5-102Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-103Vinyl .......................................................... 5-98Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-99Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-100

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-64

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-102Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-104Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-104Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-104

1

Audio System(s) (cont.)Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-100Radio with CD ............................................ 3-65Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-75Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-100Setting the Time .......................................... 3-64Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-102Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-103XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-104

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-25Operation ................................................... 2-32

Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch ................. 3-17

BBattery .......................................................... 5-44

Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-36Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6Emergencies ................................................ 4-8Parking ...................................................... 2-40System Warning Light .................................. 3-35

Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-30Brakes .......................................................... 5-41

Braking ........................................................... 4-5Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-28Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52

Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 5-58Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-56Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-55Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52Headlamps ................................................. 5-53Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-60Taillamps .................................................... 5-59

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-72

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-114Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-13, 2-22, 2-44, 4-40, 4-62Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-99Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-104Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-104

Cargo Area, All-Weather .................................. 2-72Cargo Cover Panels ........................................ 2-62

2

Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-60Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts .... 1-22Center Overhead Console ................................ 2-60Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-76Charging System Light .................................... 3-33Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-39Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-102Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-41Older Children ............................................. 1-29Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ................................... 1-43Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-43Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ........................ 1-45Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-46Top Strap ................................................... 1-39Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-40Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38

Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-104Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-101Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-99Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-96Finish Care ............................................... 5-100Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-98Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-98Leather ...................................................... 5-98Tires ........................................................ 5-102Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-102Vinyl .......................................................... 5-98Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-99Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-100

Climate Control SystemDual .......................................................... 3-20Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-22Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-27

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-26Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-26Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5

3

CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-37Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-31Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-30

Cooling System .............................................. 5-32Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-43Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4

Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18Door

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Locks .......................................................... 2-8Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-46DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-58DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-30City ........................................................... 4-34Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-35Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-38In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-32Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-45Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-44Winter ........................................................ 4-40

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-22Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-20DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-89

4

EElectrical System ........................................... 5-105

Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-108Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-106Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-105Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-105

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-22Battery ....................................................... 5-44Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-39Coolant ...................................................... 5-28Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-31Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-37Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-14Exhaust ..................................................... 2-44Fan Noise .................................................. 5-37Oil ............................................................. 5-17Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-32Overheating ................................................ 5-30Starting ...................................................... 2-29

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-18Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-28Exterior Cargo Lamps ...................................... 3-17Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22Finish Damage ............................................. 5-102Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-104Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-92Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-25Power Steering ........................................... 5-38Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-40

Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-35, 5-50Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-60Front Axle ...................................................... 5-51Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6E-85 (85% Ethanol) ....................................... 5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-9Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-9Gage ......................................................... 3-44Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-44

5

FusesCenter Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-108Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-106Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-105

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-37Fuel .......................................................... 3-44Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42Speedometer .............................................. 3-30Tachometer ................................................. 3-30Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-38Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-34

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-56Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-60GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7

Headlamps .................................................... 5-53Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52Daytime Running Lamps ....................... 3-15, 5-58Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime

Running Lamps ........................................ 5-56Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-55Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-15

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ........................................................... 3-20Heater ........................................................... 3-22Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-43Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-37Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-38HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-56HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-57Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12Release ..................................................... 5-12

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14

6

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-28Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-67Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-17Cluster ....................................................... 3-29Overview ..................................................... 3-4

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-45

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-62Lamps

Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................ 3-17Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-19Dome ........................................................ 3-18

Lamps (cont.)Exterior ...................................................... 3-14Exterior Cargo ............................................. 3-17Fog ........................................................... 3-16Reading ..................................................... 3-18

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ........................................... 1-41Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-43Level Control .................................................. 4-61Light

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-31Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-36Brake System Warning ................................. 3-35Charging System ......................................... 3-33Cruise Control ............................................. 3-43Highbeam On ............................................. 3-43Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-44Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-39Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-32Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-30Security ..................................................... 3-43Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-44Traction Off ................................................ 3-36

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................... 3-18

Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-10

7

Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12Locks

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Door ........................................................... 2-8Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door .................................................. 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-17Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-44Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-61Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-3Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-39Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2Memory Seat ................................................. 2-85Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49Midgate ......................................................... 2-13Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compassand Temperature Display ........................... 2-48

Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-45

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with CurbView Assist ............................................. 2-53

Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ 2-51Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-52Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-53Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-51

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

8

NNavigation/Radio System ................................ 3-100New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-28Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-30Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-15Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-17Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-42

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® System ............................................. 2-54Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-18Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-27Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror with CurbView Assist ............................................. 2-53

Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-51Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-52Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-53Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-51

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 5-32Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPark (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-41Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-43

ParkingBrake ........................................................ 2-40Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-43

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-32Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-58Passing ......................................................... 4-15Passlock® ...................................................... 2-27Power

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-19Door Locks .................................................. 2-9Electrical System ....................................... 5-105Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-29Seat ............................................................ 1-2Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38Windows .................................................... 2-25

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-57

9

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13

RRadios .......................................................... 3-64

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-104Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-100Radio with CD ............................................ 3-65Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-75Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-100Setting the Time .......................................... 3-64Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-102Understanding Reception ............................ 3-103

Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-49

Locking ...................................................... 4-10Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-26Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-100Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-89Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-23Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-61Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-48

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-45

Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-45Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-56Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare

Tire ........................................................... 5-82Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-60Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-11General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System CheckChecking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-63Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-64Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-63Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-64

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-29Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-44Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-44

10

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-30Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-99Center Front Passenger Position .................... 1-22Driver Position ............................................ 1-14How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults ...................................... 1-26Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-23Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-22Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2Memory ..................................................... 2-85Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3Power Seats ................................................. 1-2Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5

Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-89Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-45Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-43Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-43Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-46

Security Light ................................................. 3-43Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-39Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-62Setting the Time ............................................. 3-64Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-102Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-41Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-43Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-95

Installing .................................................... 5-82Removing ................................................... 5-79Storing ....................................................... 5-92

Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-114Speedometer .................................................. 3-30StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 4-10Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-29

11

Steering ........................................................ 4-13Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-102Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7Storage Areas

All-Weather Cargo Area ................................ 2-72Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-60Center Overhead Console ............................. 2-60Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-60Glove Box .................................................. 2-60Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-61Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-61Top-Box Storage .......................................... 2-77

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-44Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-25Sunroof ......................................................... 2-84

TTachometer .................................................... 3-30Tailgate ......................................................... 2-22Taillamps ....................................................... 5-59Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-102Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-26

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-26Passlock® ................................................... 2-27

Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-30Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7

Tires ............................................................. 5-61Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ............................................... 5-101Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72Chains ....................................................... 5-76Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78Cleaning ................................................... 5-102If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-67Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-82Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-82Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-79Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-89Spare Tire .................................................. 5-95Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-92Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-62Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-65Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-73Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-71

Tonneau Cover ............................................... 2-78Top Strap ...................................................... 1-39Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-40Top-Box Storage ............................................. 2-77Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-35

12

Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-44Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-56Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-62Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-56

TractionAssist System (TAS) ...................................... 4-8Off Light ..................................................... 3-36Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-10

TrailerRecommendations ....................................... 4-61

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-38

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-32Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 4-61Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-103Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-73

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivSymbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-58Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders .................................................... 7-9Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-104Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-104

Vehicle PersonalizationMemory Seat .............................................. 2-85

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-27Visors ........................................................... 2-25Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-34

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-28Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6

13

Warnings (cont.)Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74Replacement ............................................... 5-74

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38Windows ....................................................... 2-24

Power ........................................................ 2-25Windshield

Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-100Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10

Fluid .......................................................... 5-40

Windshield WiperBlade Replacement ...................................... 5-60Fuses ...................................................... 5-105Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-40

XXM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-104

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2005 chevrolet avalanche owner manual m - buick · 2020-03-17 · 2005 chevrolet avalanche owner...

Documents